2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-312138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-01-012024-12-312138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31aptd:BeforeNonUnderlyingItemsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-01-012024-12-31aptd:BeforeNonUnderlyingItemsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31aptd:NonUnderlyingItemsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-01-012024-12-31aptd:NonUnderlyingItemsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-12-312138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-12-312138009VHA1WI2VKMA282023-12-312138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282023-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282023-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282023-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282023-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282023-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282023-12-31ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-12-31ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-12-31ifrs-full:TreasurySharesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282023-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-12-31aptd:BorrowingsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31aptd:BorrowingsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-12-31aptd:BorrowingsMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282024-12-31ifrs-full:LeaseLiabilitiesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:LeaseLiabilitiesMember2138009VHA1WI2VKMA282025-12-31ifrs-full:LeaseLiabilitiesMemberiso4217:GBPiso4217:GBPxbrli:shares
Graphics
Aptitude Software
Group Plc
Annual Report
2025
Annual Report 2025

Graphics
Contents

Graphics
Contents
1
Contents
Strategic Report
2 Key Operational and Financial Highlights
3 Chairman’s Statement
5 Chief Executive Officers Report
8 Financial Review
11 Section 172 Statement, Engaging with our stakeholders
13 Non-Financial Reporting
14 Responsible Business Report
19 Task Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) Reports
24 Principal Risks
27 Going Concern & Viability Statement
Governance
29 The Board
31 Governance Framework
32 Board Governance
37 Nomination Committee Report
39 Audit Committee Report
45 Directors’ Remuneration Report
67 Directors’ Report
72 Statement of Directors’ Responsibility
Financial Statements
73 Independent Auditors Report
81 Consolidated Income Statement
82 Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
83 Balance Sheets
84 Consolidated Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity
85 Company Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity
86 Statements of Cash Flow
87 Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
Supplementary Information
136 Shareholder Information
IBC Advisors

Graphics
Key Operational
and Financial Highlights
2
Key Operational
Year ended 31 December 2025 2024 % Change
Annual Recurring Revenue1, 2 (‘ARR’) at year end £49.8m £50.3m (1%)
  AI Autonomous Finance
6
£17.9m £16.8m 7%
  Other Software £27.5m £28.5m (4%)
  Assure £4.4m £5.0m (12%)
Revenue
Total Revenue £65.0m £70.0m (7%)
  Recurring Revenue3 £54.0m £54.4m (1%)
  Non-Recurring Revenue £11.0m £15.6m (29%)
Recurring Revenue proportion 83% 78% 5%
Profit and EPS
Adjusted Operating Profit4 £10.0m £9.9m 1%
Statutory Operating Profit £4.8m £5.7m (15%)
Adjusted Operating Margin4 15% 14% 1%
Basic Earnings per Share 7.3p 8.8p (17%)
Cash and Balance Sheet
Cash and cash equivalents at year end £29.6m £30.4m (3%)
Net funds5 £21.2m £20.3m 4%
Share buyback completed £5.1m £4.0m 28%
Final Ordinary Dividend per Share 3.6p 3.6p
Full Year Ordinary Dividend per Share 5.4p 5.4p
Operational Highlights
Following the formal relaunch of Fynapse, the actions taken over the past year are now delivering measurable outcomes, with
stronger pipeline quality, increased partner engagement and continued commercial momentum. Key successes include:
Fynapse ARR grew approximately 70% year-on-year, reflecting strong momentum following its formal relaunch at the end of
2024.
Pipeline value increased c.65% year-on-year, with expansion in later-stage opportunities improving visibility into FY26.
Partner-led execution strengthened, with 83% of pipeline partner-influenced and 84% related to Fynapse, which currently
represents the majority of FY26 new customer opportunities.
AI Autonomous Finance ARR growth of 7% driven by expansion and renewal across existing customers, including a large
US telecommunications client and a global insurance group, alongside new wins in healthcare insurance, payments and
managed services.
Implementation timelines reduced significantly, with deployments increasingly delivered in weeks rather than months or
years, accelerating time to value for customers.
Two new Fynapse customer wins in telecommunications and financial services in Q1 2026 reflecting continued progress in
target markets.
Across both new wins and expansion activity, customers are increasingly selecting Aptitude where they are seeking faster time
to value, greater flexibility in their architecture, and the ability to modernise finance without requiring full ERP replacement.
Notes
1. Annual Recurring Revenue (‘ARR’) is the value of Aptitude’s recurring revenue at a specific point in time, normalised to a one-year period. ARR includes recurring revenues contracted
but yet to commence and excludes recurring revenues which are currently being received but for which formal termination has been received. Included in ARR are recurring
revenues from the Group’s Assure services (formerly known as solution management services).
2. Constant Currency is calculated by comparing the 2025 results with 2024 results retranslated at the rates of exchange prevailing during 2025. 2024 ARR has been restated to reflect
constant currency.
3. Recurring Revenue includes revenues from the Group’s Assure services (formerly known as solution management services).
4. Adjusted Operating Profit and Adjusted Operating Margin exclude non-underlying operating items, unless stated to the contrary, but includes share-based payments. Further detail
in respect of the non-underlying operating items can be found within Note 2.
Net Funds represents cash and cash equivalents less finance obligations, which includes capital lease obligations and a loan.
5. Certain non-IFRS financial measures (e.g. Adjusted Operating Profit) are included which assist management in comparing performance on a consistent basis.
6. AI Autonomous Finance ARR includes ARR from the Aptitude Accounting Hub (‘AAH’) and Fynapse.

Graphics
Chairman’s Statement
3
Positioned for the AI Era
As I approach the conclusion of my tenure as Chairman of Aptitude, I reflect on a period of sustained and, at times, significant
transformation. Over the past decade, the Group has evolved from a diversified software business into a focused, finance-oriented
software provider, and more recently into a SaaS-led organisation aligned to the needs of the modern CFO.
We are now entering a new phase of the market, shaped by rapid advances in AI and the increasing demand for real-time financial
insight. The Board and management team is increasingly aligning the business around a clear opportunity centered on Fynapse
and the emerging Finance ERP market.
The progress made over recent years, combined with the Group’s strong profitability and cash-generative characteristics, leaves
Aptitude well positioned against this backdrop.
Supporting a Clear Strategic Direction
During the year, the Board has worked closely with management as the Group has continued to simplify its operating model and
sharpen its strategic focus.
The decision taken in January 2026 to position Fynapse more explicitly as a Finance ERP solution reflected both market feedback
and the evolution of customer requirements and marked an important point in this transition. Since then, through continued
engagement with customers and partners, we have further reinforced our view of the scale of the opportunity and the importance
of continued investment to support its development. This points to a more scalable, higher-margin, software-led business model,
which we believe is important for long-term value creation.
The Board recognises the importance of maintaining an appropriate balance. The Group remains very profitable and cash-generative,
providing a strong foundation from which to invest. The Board is considering how best to allocate capital and resources toward
areas of highest strategic value, including the continued development and scaling of Fynapse, and this will be assessed as part of
the Strategic Review.
Market Context and Positioning
The market in which Aptitude operates is undergoing a period of structural change. Traditional ERP systems remain deeply
embedded but are not designed for the demands of real-time, AI-enabled finance. At the same time, newer entrants are bringing
innovation but often lack the scale, control, and regulatory credibility required by large, complex organisations.
We are also seeing increased investment in modern finance platforms, particularly among newer entrants, as capital is deployed
toward solutions designed for this next generation of finance systems.
This dynamic is contributing to the emergence of a distinct Finance ERP market. The Board believes Aptitude is well positioned
within this space, given its heritage in financial control, its deep domain expertise, and the capabilities developed within Fynapse.
We are encouraged by early market validation, including improvements in pipeline quality, increasing partner engagement,
positive customer feedback and recent new wins.
Governance and Board Succession
The Board continues to evolve to support the next phase of the Company’s development.
As previously communicated, I had intended to step down as Chairman following the 2026 AGM. However, in light of the Strategic
Review, the Board has concluded that it is appropriate to extend my tenure as Non-Executive Chairman until its conclusion. A
further update on Chair succession will be provided in due course, subject to the outcome of the Strategic Review. The search for
a new Chief Financial Officer remains ongoing.

Graphics
Chairman’s Statement
4
The Board remains focused on ensuring that the appropriate leadership and governance structure is in place to support the
Company’s strategic direction and long-term growth ambitions.
Strategic Review
Given the scale of the Fynapse opportunity and the investment required to accelerate development, the Board has taken the
decision to undertake a formal Strategic Review at this time. In the current macroeconomic environment, the Board believes it is
appropriate to consider the full range of options to ensure the business is optimally positioned for long-term growth.
Accordingly, the Board is reviewing the strategic options available to Aptitude, including the launch of a formal sale process, with
the aim of maximising value for shareholders, employees and other stakeholders. Options under consideration include capital
raising, strategic partnerships, portfolio optimisation and potential corporate transactions.
Capital Allocation
In 2025, the Group operated a share buyback programme and repurchased £5.1m of its own Ordinary Share Capital to 31 December
2025. The programme is in accordance with the authority granted by shareholders on 28 May 2025 to make market purchases of
the Company’s Ordinary Shares and forms part of a £20m share buyback programme over a three-year period.
The Board has decided that the share buyback programme announced on 29 May 2025 should be suspended as a result of the
strategic review. This reflects the Board’s commitment to maintaining flexibility in capital allocation while the strategic review is
underway, ensuring that all options are considered to maximise shareholder value.
The Board has proposed an unchanged final dividend of 3.60 pence per share (2024: 3.60 pence), making a total ordinary dividend
of 5.40 pence per share for the year (2024: 5.40 pence). Subject to shareholder approval at the Group’s Annual General Meeting
on 27 May, the proposed final dividend will be paid on 12 June 2026 to shareholders on the register at 22 May 2026.
Looking Ahead
As the Company enters its next phase, the priorities are clear. The focus will be on strengthening Aptitude’s position within the
emerging Finance ERP market, deepening partner-led execution and ensuring that investment is directed toward the highest-
value opportunities.
The Board believes that the strategic review will provide a clear framework for determining the optimal path forward to support
the next stage of our growth.
A Personal Reflection
I would like to take the opportunity to thank the Board, the executive team, and all colleagues across Aptitude for their commitment
and contribution during a period of significant change. Their dedication, skill, and considerable effort have been outstanding
throughout my period as Chair.
The business today is more focused, more aligned to market demand, and better positioned for the future than at any point during
my tenure. While there remains work to do, the foundations that have been put in place give me confidence in the Company’s
direction and long-term potential.
I would also like to thank our shareholders for their continued support.
We believe the Group is well positioned to capitalise on the opportunities ahead, while continuing to evaluate additional
investment avenues as part of the ongoing Strategic Review.
Ivan Martin
Chairman
7 April 2026

Graphics
Chief Executive Officerʼs Report
5
Transformation and Strategic Focus
Aptitude has continued to make strong progress over the past year, simplifying the business, sharpening our strategic priorities
and aligning the organisation around Fynapse. This reflects a continued shift toward a more scalable, higher-margin, software-led
model.
Following the relaunch of Fynapse at the end of 2024, our focus in 2025 has been on testing its positioning in the market, validating
demand and refining how we go to market. This has provided clear feedback from customers and partners, which is shaping how
we now position the business and where we invest going forward.
Fynapse Relaunch and Positioning
We formally relaunched Fynapse to the market at the end of 2024, with dedicated teams and a focused go-to-market approach,
marking the first time the product was properly taken to market. As a result, Fynapse has only been in the market for a limited
period, during which ARR has grown 70% year-on-year.
During 2025, our focus has been on sharpening its positioning, strengthening how we go to market, securing new customers and
validating its role within modern finance architectures through direct engagement with customers and partners. This has provided
clear and consistent feedback, reinforcing both the strength of the platform and the scale of the opportunity ahead.
One of the key insights from customer, prospect and partner engagement has been that positioning Fynapse as a subledger
understates the breadth of value it can deliver. As the market evolves, driven by advances in AI and demand for real-time financial
insight, we are expanding this positioning to Fynapse as a Finance ERP - better reflecting both the needs of the market and the role
Fynapse can play as a finance-grade system of record and action.
In parallel, we are simplifying how we present the business and our range of products. Rather than describing multiple products
and use cases, we now lead with a clear, single proposition aligned to where the market is moving.
Financial Strength and Discipline
While the macroeconomic and geopolitical environment remains uncertain and has impacted the timing and progression of some
deals, we have continued to execute with discipline. Aptitude remains a very profitable and cash-generative business, providing
resilience in the current environment and a strong platform to invest and grow.
Market Evolution and Structural Shift
The market we operate in is undergoing rapid structural change, driven by advances in AI and increasing demand for real-time
financial insight.
Traditional ERP platforms remain important but are not AI-native and were not designed for real-time, event-driven finance.
Built around batch processing, periodic reporting and retrospective analysis, these systems are difficult to adapt to an AI-enabled
model without fundamental re-architecture.
At the other end of the market, newer entrants are building AI-native solutions but typically lack the scale, control and regulatory
credibility required by enterprise organisations. This is creating a clear gap for Fynapse, where organisations require both modern,
AI-ready architecture and enterprise-grade control.

Graphics
Chief Executive Officerʼs Report
6
Emergence of the Finance ERP Market
We are seeing the emergence of a new market - Finance ERP - a modular, finance-focused layer that sits alongside existing
systems, enabling real-time, governed financial data and supporting AI-driven decision-making.
This is changing how finance operates. Teams can move from periodic reporting to continuous insight - improving in-period
visibility of profitability, cash and risk, and enabling outcomes such as real-time decision-making, reduced manual processes and
faster close cycles. Over time, this supports the evolution of finance from a reporting function to an active driver of business
performance.
At the same time, this is driving a separation between operational ERP systems and finance capabilities. Operational systems
continue to support areas such as HR, procurement and supply chain, while finance is increasingly implemented as a distinct layer
focused on financial data, control and decision-making.
Fynapse Differentiation and AI Defensibility and Leadership
We believe Aptitude is uniquely positioned to lead in this space. Our heritage in subledger, accounting hub and financial control
systems, combined with vertical specialisation, means Fynapse is built on proven foundations already embedded within complex,
regulated organisations. This allows us to extend an established position at the core of finance into a broader role as both the
system of record and system of action for finance.
This foundation of finance-grade, auditable data creates a strong point of defensibility, particularly in an AI context where outcomes
are only as reliable as the underlying data. This is especially important in complex, high-volume and regulated environments,
where accuracy, control and auditability are critical.
As AI evolves, including the emergence of agentic AI, its effective use in finance will depend on access to structured, governed data
and pre-configured, sector-specific capabilities - areas where we believe Fynapse is well positioned.
Market Validation and Customer Response
Importantly, we are seeing this reflected in the market. Despite being early in our go-to-market journey with Fynapse, customer
and partner feedback has been strong, and the product is resonating as organisations reassess their finance architecture.
This validation is now translating into measurable progress across the business, with improvements in pipeline quality, partner
engagement and commercial performance during 2025.
What is also becoming clear is a change in how organisations approach finance transformation. Rather than treating finance as
part of broader ERP replacement programmes, it is increasingly being addressed independently.
This is reflected in how solutions are being bought and deployed, with organisations prioritising targeted investment in finance
capabilities alongside existing systems.
This is particularly evident in financial services, where organisations are reassessing large-scale ERP transformation programmes
and increasingly prioritising more targeted approaches to modernising finance.
2025 Achievements: Driving Momentum
Building on this progress, we have continued to strengthen the business and build momentum across product, go-to-market and
partner execution. Key achievements include:
Pipeline value increased c.65% year-on-year, with expansion in later-stage opportunities improving visibility into FY26.
Partner-led execution strengthened, with 83% of pipeline connected to partners and Fynapse representing the majority of
FY26 opportunities.
Growth driven by expansion and renewal across existing customers, including a large US telecommunications client and a
global insurance group, alongside new wins in healthcare insurance, payments and managed services.
Implementation timelines reduced significantly, with deployments increasingly delivered in weeks rather than months or
years, accelerating time to value for customers.
These developments reflect a clear improvement in pipeline quality, progression of opportunities and alignment with partners.

Graphics
7
Accelerating Strategic Focus
As we progress, we are taking clear action to simplify and focus the business. We are prioritising Fynapse as our core growth
engine and aligning our product portfolio accordingly. Mature and non-core products are being placed into maintenance, enabling
us to concentrate resource and investment on areas that will drive long-term value. At the same time we are maintaining a
disciplined approach to the cost base, driving efficiencies across the organization. This reflects the scale of the opportunity ahead
as AI reshapes the finance systems market. Maintaining a broad portfolio would dilute our ability to capture it.
By concentrating on Fynapse and the Finance ERP market, we are creating a clearer, more scalable and more efficient business.
Accelerating Fynapse: Strategic Review and Investment
Aptitude continues to operate with a strong focus on profitability and cash generation. This provides resilience in the current
environment and flexibility in how we invest.
However, given the scale of the Fynapse opportunity, the progress we have made, and the strength of feedback from customers
and partners, it is clear further investment is required to accelerate its development and commercialisation.
The Board has taken the decision to undertake a strategic review of the options available to Aptitude. In the current macroeconomic
environment, the Board believe it is appropriate to consider the full range of options to ensure we identify the best path forward
to support our strategy and long-term growth, whilst maximising value for shareholders, employees and other stakeholders.
Further details are set out in a separate announcement released alongside the Group’s FY25 results.
A High-Performance, AI-Enabled Organisation
We are building a high-performance organisation aligned around clear priorities, while increasingly leveraging AI to improve
productivity, reduce manual effort and accelerate delivery across the business.
This will enable us to operate more efficiently and scale without proportionate increases in cost, while strengthening our ability to
attract and retain high-quality talent aligned to an AI-led environment.
Outlook
Aptitude is entering a more focused and strategically aligned phase of its transformation. We have simplified our proposition,
strengthened our positioning and improved the quality of our pipeline and partner engagement. The market is evolving in a
direction that increasingly supports our strategy.
We remain mindful of ongoing macroeconomic and geopolitical conditions but continue to see underlying growth in demand for
modern, AI-native finance architecture.
As we move into the next phase, we are undertaking a strategic review to assess the options available to further accelerate our
strategy, with a particular focus on identifying the optimal path to scale Fynapse and maximise long-term value.
In 2026 and beyond, our priorities are clear:
Define the future corporate strategy for the Group
Scale Fynapse within the emerging Finance ERP market
Deepen partner-led execution
Maintain strong profitability and cash generation
Invest selectively to accelerate growth
Alex Curran
Chief Executive Officer
7 April 2026

Graphics
Financial Review
8
Revenue
Revenue for the year was £65.0 million (2024: £70.0 million). On a constant currency basis, revenue was approximately £65.0
million compared with £69.2 million in the prior year. The reduction primarily reflects lower levels of non-recurring implementation
activity as the Group continues to transition towards a more partner-led delivery model, while recurring revenues remained
broadly stable.
Recurring Revenues
Annual Recurring Revenue (‘ARR’) reduced by 1% on a constant currency basis in the year to £49.8 million at 31 December 2025
(31 December 2024: £50.3 million, restated for the prevailing exchange rate at 31 December 2025).
ARR is the key financial metric for the Group. Included within ARR are Aptitude’s annual licence fees and maintenance for its
on-premises clients, subscription fees for the Group’s SaaS clients and revenues from its Solution Management Service offering
(‘Aptitude Assure’), this offering contributed ARR at 31 December 2025 of £4.4 million (31 December 2024: £5.0 million).
Net Retention Rate in the year was 98% (2024: 99%), measured by the total value of on-going ARR at the year-end from clients
in place at the start of the year as a percentage of the opening ARR from those clients on a constant currency basis. The Group
continues to benefit from standard inflation-linked clauses in many of its contracts, although the level of indexation applied during
the year was lower than in the prior period, reflecting the inflation environment relative to the elevated levels experienced in
recent years.
Recurring revenues recognised in the income statement under IFRS decreased by 1% to £54.0 million (2024: £54.4 million).
Recurring revenue represented 83% of total Group revenue in 2025 (2024: 78%). Increasing the proportion of recurring revenues
are a strategic priority for the Group, alongside driving growth in ARR, as this enhances the visibility and quality of revenue and
supports the long-term expansion of operating margins.
Non-Recurring Revenue
Non-recurring revenue recognised in the year under IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers, comprising implementation
services, configuration activities and non-recurring software licence fees, totalled £11.0 million for the year ended 31 December
2025 (2024: £15.6 million), representing a 29% decrease year on year.
The reduction in non-recurring revenue is consistent with the Group’s strategic shift towards higher levels of partner-led
implementation activity and reflects shorter implementation cycles for Fynapse.
Research & Development Expenditure
Total expenditure on product management, research and development decreased by 25.4% to £13.2 million for the year ended
31 December 2025 (2024: £17.7 million). The reduction reflects a combination of organisational efficiencies following the
restructuring of the Product and Technology functions during 2025 and a continued focus on prioritising investment in the Group’s
highest value product initiatives, including those supporting the AI Autonomous Finance strategy.
Research and development investment continues to be actively managed to ensure an appropriate balance between product
innovation and overall return on investment across the Group’s product portfolio. Research and development costs represented
20.3% of Group revenue in 2025 (2024: 25.3%).
The Board has determined that none of the internally generated research and development expenditure incurred during the year
met the criteria for capitalisation under IAS 38 Intangible Assets, and accordingly these costs have been expensed as incurred
through the income statement.
Operating Profit and Margins
Adjusted Operating Profit for the year ended 31 December 2025 was £10.0 million (2024: £9.9 million), in line with expectations.
Adjusted Operating Margin increased to 15.4% (2024: 14.1%), reflecting the Group’s improving revenue mix and continued focus
on disciplined cost management. Adjusted Operating Profit is presented before certain items which management considers non-
underlying in nature in order to provide a clearer view of the Group’s underlying operating performance.
Statutory operating profit, reported under IFRS, was £4.8 million (2024: £5.7 million).
The improvement in adjusted operating margin was supported by the continued progress of Fynapse, whose cloud-native
architecture is expected to further enhance the Group’s margin profile and long-term profitability.

Graphics
9
Foreign Exchange
With 54% (2024: 50%) of the Group’s revenues generated from North American clients, the majority of which are invoiced in US
dollars and translated into sterling for reporting purposes, the Group’s reported financial results are exposed to movements in the
US dollar exchange rate.
Non-Underlying Items
Non-underlying items for the year totalled £5.2 million (2024: £4.2 million), comprising primarily £1.8 million of costs associated
with the restructuring of the Product and Technology functions (2024: £0.9 million), which relates to a specific programme and is
not expected to recur on an ongoing basis, and amortisation of acquired intangibles of £3.4 million (2024: £3.4 million).
Taxation
The total tax charge before adjusting for the impact of non-underlying and other sundry items of £1.9 million (2024: £1.5 million)
represents 19.7% of the Group’s profit before tax (2024: 15.1%).
Statutory Results
The Group reported a profit for the year attributable to equity shareholders of £4.0 million (2024: £5.0 million).
Earnings per Share
Adjusted Basic Earnings per Share decreased by 3.6% to 13.4 pence (2024: 13.9 pence) and Basic Earnings per Share decreased
17.0% to 7.3 pence (2024: 8.8 pence).
Dividend
A final ordinary dividend of 3.60 pence per share is proposed (2024: 3.60 pence), making a total ordinary dividend of 5.40 pence
per share for the year (2024: 5.40 pence).
Balance Sheet
The Group continues to have a strong balance sheet with net assets at 31 December 2025 of £54.2 million (2024: £57.9 million).
Cash at 31 December 2025 was £29.6 million (31 December 2024: £30.4 million) and net funds of £21.2 million (31 December
2024: £20.3 million). The Group continued to fund both the ordinary dividend of £3.0 million (2024: £3.1 million) and the share
buyback programme £5.1 million (2024: £4.0 million) in the year, providing enhanced returns to shareholders.
Trade receivables (net) at 31 December 2025 decreased to £6.6 million (2024: £12.1 million) of which £3.7 million (2024:
£6.8 million) were overdue for payment at the end of the year. Of these overdue balances £3.2 million has been collected at 13th
March 2026. DSO (debtor days) decreased to 34 at 31 December 2025 (2024: 55) as a result of improved collections at year-end
combined with a detailed focus on a small number of long-running disputes being settled prior to 31 December 2025. Deferred
income at 31 December 2025 decreased to £28.2 million (2024: £32.2 million), reflecting the recognition of revenue from prior
year invoicing outpacing new billings during the year.
Capital Allocation Policy
Aptitude aims to deliver high returns to shareholders through targeting sustainable profit growth and strong free cash flow. The
Group invests in developing its business driven by the opportunity with Fynapse, while maintaining robust liquidity to manage the
working capital cycle. Aptitude’s capital allocation priorities are as follows:
Managing working capital – The priority of the Group is to maintain sufficient cash reserves to manage the annual working
capital cycle, while maintaining appropriate levels of net funds. A level of net cash not less than 1.5 x adjusted EBITDA is the
Group’s stated minimum.
Investment for organic growth – The Group continues to invest in the organic growth of the business, including the need to
continue to invest in our people and technology and through capital expenditure where required.
Maintenance of the Group’s dividend The Group is committed to provide dividends to shareholders, and this remains
the preferred ongoing method to return cash to shareholders without impacting on the investment required to grow the
business.

Graphics
Financial Review
10
Enhanced returns to shareholdersAs the Group continues to generate excess cash after the above priorities, the Group will
look to make enhanced returns to shareholders, including through the existing share buy back programme.
While the above framework is intended to guide decision making for the allocation of capital, the Board may choose to exercise
discretion in its application should there be a business requirement.

Graphics
Section 172 Statement,
Engaging with our stakeholders
11
In accordance with section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 and the UK Corporate Governance Code 2024, the Board considers the
potential impact of its decisions on the Company’s key stakeholders and takes their views and interests into account when carrying
out their duties. The following sections form part of this statement and provide insight into the Board’s engagement with different
stakeholder groups, ensuring their interests are reflected in the Board’s decision-making process.
In performing their duties during the year, the Directors have had regard for the matters set out in Section 172(1) (a) to (f) of the
Companies Act 2006, namely to promote the success of the Company for its members as a whole and, in doing so, having regard
to, amongst other matters:
the likely consequences of any decisions in the long term;
the interests of employees;
the need to foster business relationships with suppliers, customers and others;
the impact of operations on the community and environment;
the desirability of maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct; and
the need to act fairly between members of the Group.
Workforce engagement
Our people are key to the long-term development of our business. Their engagement and motivation are vital to us fulfilling
our purpose, living our values, protecting our culture, and delivering our strategic objectives. The Board is fully committed to
ensuring that the opinions of employees across all countries and business areas are regularly sought and factored into its decision-
making process.
Paula Dowdy is the designated independent Non-Executive Director with responsibility for overseeing wider workforce
engagement, and employees can raise any concerns with her. The Board considers this the most effective method to ensure the
employee's voice is heard at the very top of the organisation.
The Group has implemented extensive measures to engage its employees. These engagement activities enable the Board to gather
opinions and ideas from the wider workforce, identify any communication gaps or common areas of concern, and address these
through the Group’s activities. In addition, the Board receives regular reports on employee matters from the SVP, People & Culture,
including information relating to employee satisfaction and engagement, recruitment, retention and training and development.
Our quarterly employee engagement surveys maintained an average response rate of 74% during the year.
During 2025, the Board engaged with the workforce through: onsite visits; all employee face-to- face engagement sessions; one-
to-one sessions with Senior Leadership Team members; presentations and reports from senior management at Board meetings;
and day-to-day engagement outside of these formal settings.
The objectives and key results (“OKR”) framework for the Group, which was introduced in 2023, has provided a clear basis for
communicating expectations and measuring individual, team, and organisational performance. Regular ‘All Hands’ communication
sessions are held to discuss progress against OKRs and other matters with all employees.
Shareholder engagement
The Board engages with institutional shareholders on the annual and interim results, as well as on significant matters relating to
strategy and governance via a combination of in-person meetings and video conference meetings. Updates are provided to the
Board on the views of the Group’s major investors, and these are factored into the Board’s decision-making process and when
providing market communication.
All shareholders are encouraged to submit questions prior to the Annual General Meeting and to lodge their votes ahead of the
meeting to ensure that these are counted. The Annual Report is sent to shareholders at least 21 clear working days before the
Annual General Meeting and each issue for consideration at the Annual General Meeting is proposed as a separate resolution. All
Directors generally attend the Annual General Meeting. At our 2025 Annual General Meeting, which was held on 28 May 2025, all
resolutions passed.
The Board ensures that the Group’s shareholders are treated equally and fairly, regardless of the size of their shareholding or their
status as a private or institutional shareholder. The Group provides clear and timely communications to all shareholders in their
chosen communication medium, as well as via the Group’s website and via the Regulatory News Service. All holders of Ordinary
Shares are eligible to receive dividend payments and to vote at general meetings of the Company.

Graphics
Section 172 Statement,
Engaging with our stakeholders
12
Customer engagement
The Group is proactive in engaging directly with its customers to monitor and continually improve service delivery and customers
satisfaction. The Board receives monthly reports on client-related matters, including support ticket levels, service delivery and
client health reports, which enable it to identify any trends or any areas requiring specific oversight or investment.
Where concerns are raised by customers, the Group ensures that they are addressed swiftly and that proactive engagement
occurs to maintain high standards of service delivery.
The Group seeks direct engagement with customers through regular Customer Advisory Boards, which directly inform its product
development and innovation strategies. In addition, CFO forums for prospective and existing customers provide a platform for
wide-ranging discussions on pertinent issues. Feedback received from customers through these forums and through regular
day-to-day interaction with the Group’s customer-facing teams are used to inform the Board’s decision-making process during
the year. The Group’s Chief Customer Experience Officer directs the global services, support and success teams with overall
responsibility for the end-to-end customer life cycle, tightening of customer health processes, and targeted product investment.
Strategic partner engagement
The Group works with a range of leading organisations to deliver long-term value to its customers, including advisory, consulting,
integration and technology providers that bring complementary services and solutions to its customer base. The Group engages
with its partners through regular product and thought leadership briefings, as well as a comprehensive sales and delivery
enablement programme. The Board actively encourages feedback from the Group’s partner firms on the quality of its services and
products to support continuous improvement.
Supplier engagement
The Group engages closely with its suppliers and has internal procedures to ensure that appropriate due diligence is undertaken.
Suppliers are selected based on their ability to meet the Group’s own high standards and to demonstrate values that are consistent
with those of the Group. Regular engagement takes place with key suppliers, monitoring their performance against contractual
obligations, and providing regular feedback to foster and support long-term relationships for the benefit of the Group. Should
delivery standards not meet the Group’s expectations, proactive steps are taken to communicate and address these issues directly
with the supplier, ensuring there is no detrimental impact upon the Group’s activities.
Engagement with the wider community
The Board ensures ethical and responsible decision making by taking into consideration the wider society beyond the organisation.
The Group is committed to contributing towards the communities in which it operates.
The Group operates a charitable donation scheme whereby it will match the funds raised by employees for specific charities
up to £500 (or local equivalent) per event. The Group also supports and organises regular activities to increase awareness and
raise funds for its chosen charities. These activities are coordinated by regional social committees, and employees are actively
encouraged to participate.
The environment
As a provider of software solutions, the Group’s operations have a relatively limited impact on the environment. However, the
Board is committed to implementing measures that will result in incremental improvements to the Group’s environmental impact,
where appropriate.
The Group‘s full carbon footprint is contained in the Responsible Business Report on pages 16 to 18.
Maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct
The Board recognises that the continued growth and success of the Group is dependent upon maintaining high standards of
business conduct. These standards underpin the Group’s ability to:
successfully compete within the market, to attract and retain clients and to service these clients to a high standard;
attract and retain high quality employees;
attract investors and to meet their expectations of good governance and sound business conduct; and
comply with the Group’s legal and regulatory obligations, and meet the expectations of relevant regulatory bodies.
This awareness underpins the Group’s strategy and is evident throughout the Board’s decision-making process. Further information
on Aptitude’s ethical approach is contained in the Responsible Business report on page 14 to 16.

Graphics
Non-Financial Reporting
13
Non-Financial Reporting requirements
Our reporting is compliant with the Non-Financial Reporting requirements contained in sections 414CA and 414CB of the
Companies Act 2006. The table below, and the information it refers to, is intended to help stakeholders understand our position
on key non-financial matters. This is in addition to the reporting we already do under the Carbon Disclosure Project (CDP).
Where to find further information Relevant Policies Page
Environmental matters Responsible Business
Task Force on Climate-related Financial
Disclosures
Principal Risks
Environmental 16 to 23
Employees Responsible Business Diversity
Principal Risks
Health & Safety
Code of Ethics
14
24
15
16
Social matters Engaging with our stakeholders Charitable Donations 12
Human rights Responsible Business
Modern Slavery Statement (see
aptitudesoftware.com)
Modern Slavery Statement
Human Rights
16
16
Anti-bribery and
corruption
Audit Committee Report Anti–bribery and Corruption
Whistleblowing
43
44

Graphics
Responsible Business Report
14
Our People
Aptitude recognises that it has an important role in creating value for all its stakeholders,
including employees, customers, and shareholders. Operating responsibly is a key factor
in driving this value creation over the longer term. All members of the Board, together
with senior management and the Company Secretary, take an active role in shaping and
monitoring the Group’s environmental, social and governance (“ESG”) activities.
Culture and Values
The Group’s core purpose is to provide software solutions that deliver fully autonomous
finance to enable its customers to drive growth, efficiency, and sustainability. This
purpose is at the heart of the Group’s strategy, vision, mission and corporate values,
and is clearly articulated throughout the business. During 2025, we maintained our
commitment to fostering a high-performance culture and a diverse and motivated
workforce to enable the execution of our strategy. Our efforts were concentrated on
managing overall performance, reducing attrition rates, and establishing a ‘reward
for performance’ system. Our key attitudes which underpin this culture, namely ‘win
together’, ‘embrace challenge’, ‘own it’ and ‘client & partner driven’ continue to be
embedded in our objectives and key results (“OKRs”) at all levels and feature in the
Group’s employee reward and recognition processes.
Equality, Diversity and Inclusion (“EDI”)
The Group is strongly committed to encouraging equality, diversity and inclusion among
our workforce, and eliminating discrimination. Our people are champions of creating a
culture of belonging, support and trust, and we work with others who are aligned with
these values.
We aim for our teams to be truly representative of all sections of society and to ensure
that our clients, partners and employees feel they belong, and that they are respected.
We have a zero-tolerance approach against intentional discrimination by anyone at
Aptitude. We also expect the same approach from our customers, partners, suppliers,
and in our communities.
We believe that everyone has a voice at Aptitude and together our diverse voices fuel
the very best innovation that is celebrated and admired by others. Creating a culture of
belonging, support and trust positively impacts everyone at Aptitude, and we work with
clients and partners who share the same values.
Equality, Diversity and Inclusion matter to the Group because it enables us to:
better understand and meet the needs of our customers, placing us ahead of the
competition;
attract and retain the very best people, supporting them to flourish and fully
contribute at work; and
build on different perspectives and experiences to continuously improve and excel
at what we do.
The Group’s EDI policy remains consistent with the requirements of the Universal
Declaration on Human Rights and the spirit of the International Labour Organisation’s
core labour standards.
Across the overall business 27% of our workforce (83 employees) identified as women,
69% (212 employees) identified as men, and 4% (11 employees) preferred not to self-
describe. We recognise that the software industry traditionally attracts more male
than female employees; therefore, a continuing focus going forward will be to look at
opportunities to highlight Aptitude, and the software industry as a whole, as an attractive
career choice for women. We are keen supporters of the Women in Tech initiative. The
diversity of the Board and Senior Leadership Team can be found on page 14.
Employees
83
Female
306
Total
212
Male
11
Prefer
not to say
2
Female
3
Total
1
Male
0
Prefer
not to say
Senior Leadership Team
3
Female
4
Total
1
Male
0
Prefer
not to say
Board
Gender Ratios
1
1. Data as at 31 December 2025

Graphics
15
The People and Culture function drives initiatives to promote the importance of diversity
and inclusion across the Group. During 2025 we focused on initiatives around celebrating
women leaders in the organisation. These initiatives included hosting Women in Leadership
forums, which are designed to support women and increase their presence in leadership
roles within Aptitude, and Pride Tribes, which allow small groups of women to come
together regularly for peer-to-peer mentorship.
In 2026, further activities are planned to celebrate women leaders within the Group.
We plan to continue our efforts to increase representation and further embed inclusive
behaviours into our ways of working. As part of our plan, our ambition is to further break
down barriers to entry and progression. Through increased focus on career development
paths, transparent leadership development frameworks, and education, we can ensure our
employees have a sense of belonging and can bring their whole selves to the workplace.
We give our employees opportunities to grow and contribute, allowing us to strengthen the
talent pipeline into leadership positions which will ensure our long-term sustainable growth.
Gender pay gap reporting
As the Group has fewer than 250 employees in the United Kingdom, it is not required to
publish a gender pay gap report. However, the Group has internal processes to ensure that
salary levels and salary increases are fair and comparable for male and female employees
in equivalent roles. These processes are overseen by the Executive Directors for the wider
workforce, and by the Remuneration Committee for senior management.
The Group’s 2025 gender pay gap analysis showed the Group’s gender pay gap across the
Group’s main countries of operation to be in line with and, in some cases, better than its
peer group. The Board does not feel that voluntary publication of the Group’s gender pay
gap will provide meaningful disclosure.
Broader diversity
The Group is committed to understanding the diversity of its workforce beyond gender
representation. Aptitude must adhere to regional requirements in terms of how this data
is collected and used, and this includes obtaining express permissions from employees in
certain countries. The regional distribution of the Group’s employees as at 31 December
2025 was as follows: Poland 50%; United Kingdom 29%; North America 12%; other
regions 9%.
Employee Health and Wellbeing
At Aptitude we strive to reduce stigma related to mental wellbeing. During 2025 we
continued to focus on employees’ mental health. Everyone at Aptitude has access to our
Employee Assistance Program, with broad access to psychologists and other specialists.
We continued to collaborate with a specialist neuropsychologist, focusing on everyone’s
personal superpowers, which can help manage anxiety and stress. We also promoted
open communication with leaders and restructured our People Partners system to ensure
every employee knows who their designated People Partner is.
We know that our people thrive when they feel empowered. We recognise that flexibility
means different things to different people and have taken a progressive and inclusive
approach to flexible working. However, we also recognise the importance of interaction
and collaboration and have designed our office spaces accordingly.
Engagement with Suppliers, Customers and other Business Partners
The Group proactively engages with its suppliers, customers, and other business partners
on a regular basis, to ensure that relationships function effectively and support the long-
term success of the Group. Details of how the Group undertakes this engagement can be
found in the Section 172 statement on pages 11 to 12.
SingaporeCanadaAustralia
USAUnited Kingdom
12%
5%
2%
2%
50%
29%
Poland
Nationality

Graphics
Responsible Business Report
16
Business Ethics
At Aptitude, we have well-established processes to drive ethical business behaviours across the organisation and in our interactions
with all our stakeholders. This includes a suite of policies to support strong ethical behaviour in our conduct with each other, our
customers, and all of our stakeholders.
Aptitude considers that paying tax is part of our corporate responsibility, and our contribution in taxes is one of the ways in which
we help to build and sustain the economy. Aptitude’s tax affairs are overseen by the Audit Committee and monitored by the
Board. The Group is committed to ensuring that it pays the appropriate level of taxes, in line with the generation of economic
value, in all regions in which it operates. The Group has robust oversight processes on taxation, working with its advisors to ensure
responsible compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.
The Group’s 2025 Modern Slavery and Human Trafficking statement is published on the Group’s website
www.aptitudesoftware.com.
Energy and Carbon Reporting
The Group is committed to monitoring and reducing its emissions year-on-year and is aware of its reporting obligations under The
Companies (Directors’ Report) and Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy and Carbon Report) Regulations 2018.
2025 performance
The Group calculates its environmental impact across scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions sources. Emissions are presented on both a
location and market basis. On a location basis our scope 1 and 2 emissions are 63 tCO
2
e (2024: 123 tCO
2
e), with electricity usage
and district heating and cooling both falling year-on-year. Scope 3 emissions are 2,978 tCO
2
e (2024: 3,535 tCO
2
e), a 16% decrease
year-on-year, largely down to a decrease in emissions associated with Purchased Goods and Services during the year. The Group
calculates and tracks emission intensity metrics (scope 1 and 2 Location Based) on a revenue basis. Emissions of 1.0t CO
2
e per
£1,000,000 turnover are reported for 2025.
2025 reporting methodology
This section has been prepared for the reporting period of 1 January 2025 to 31 December 2025 using the reporting period of
January 2024 to December 2024 for comparison, as well as including the GHG emissions from 2019-2024 as a point of reference.
The Group has defined its organisational boundary using an operational control approach. The Group’s figures include all sites.
For transparency purposes, we were unable to obtain verifiable energy usage data from our offices in Sydney and Toronto have
therefore had to use estimated figures. Our Singapore office shut in 2024.
GHG emissions have been calculated from business activities in accordance with the principles and requirements of the World
Resources Institute (WRI) GHG Protocol: A Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard (revised version) and Environmental
Reporting Guidelines: Including Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting requirements (March 2019). We are reporting our scope
3 emissions for the third time, having completed our first assessment in 2023, with guidance from the GHG Protocol Corporate
Value Chain (Scope 3) Accounting and Reporting Standard and the GHG Protocol Technical Guidance for Calculating Scope 3
Emissions, as required. In line with the Greenhouse Gas Protocol, we continue to review our reporting in light of any changes in
business structure, calculation methodology and the accuracy or availability of data. Scope 3 emissions have been calculated using
a hybrid approach with both the average data method and spend data method employed. Emissions have been calculated using
the appropriate conversion factors (e.g. DEFRA 2025 and IEA 2025).

Graphics
17
Emissions and energy usage from 2019 to 2025
Global emissions tCO
2
e
1
Emissions source 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024
3
2025
Group
YOY
Natural gas 53 33 31 29 80 1 2 59%
Company cars2 2 2 2
Refrigerant 21 3 10 10
Total Scope 1 76 38 33 29 80 11 12 7%
Electricity (Location based) 444 321 252 131 83 59 46 -23%
Electricity (Market based) 568 366 306 178 115 85 68 -20%
District heating and cooling
(Location based)
53 5 -91%
District heating and cooling
(Market based)
53 5 -91%
Total Scope 1 + 2 Location based 520 359 285 160 163 123 63 -49%
Total Scope 1 + 2 Market based 644 404 339 207 195 149 85 -47%
Total Scope 3 3,227 3,017
5
3,535 2,978 -16%
Total Scope 1, 2 + 3 Location
based
3,387 3,180
5
3,658 3,041 -17%
 Total Scope 1, 2 + 3 Market based 3,434 3,212
5
3,685 3,063 -17%
Intensity metric, £m turnover 57.3 59.3 74.4 74.7 70 65% -7%
Normaliser, tCO
2
e per £m
turnover
6.3 4.8 2.1 2.2 1.8 1.0 -44%
Total Energy Usage (kWh)4 676,626 416,628 615,680 457,402 179,365 -61%
2024 – 2025 Scope 1 and 2 emissions and energy usage comparison
Global Scope 1 and 2 emissions tCO
2
e
1
Emissions source FY 2024 FY 2025
UK Global ex UK UK Global ex UK UK YOY
Global ex UK
YOY Group YOY
Natural gas 1 2 59% 59%
Company cars
2
Refrigerant
3
10 10
Total Scope 1 11 12 7% 7%
Electricity (Location based) 12 48 12 34 1% -28% -23%
Electricity (Market based) 22 63 20 48 -8% -25% -20%
District heating (Location based) 53 5 -91% -91%
District heating (Market based) 53 5 -91% -91%
Total Scope 1 + 2 Location based 23 101 24 39 4% -61% -49%
Total Scope 1 + 2 Market based 33 116 32 53 -3% -55% -43%
Total Energy Usage (kWh)
4
64,010 393,392 78,459 100,905 23% -74% -61%
1 These figures are in CO
2
e including GHGs in addition to carbon dioxide and are partially based on the country-specific CO
2
emission factors developed by the International Energy
Agency, © OECD/IEA 2024 but the resulting work has been prepared by Aptitude and does not necessarily reflect the views of the International Energy Agency.
2 During 2025 the Group had no company cars in use.
3 2024 numbers have been restated due to improved data collection and quality.
4 Energy reporting includes kWh from Scope 1 and Scope 2, converting units of measure into kWh if required.
5 Restated – see note in 2024 annual report.

Graphics
Responsible Business Report
18
Scope 3 Emissions
Our evaluation confirmed that our value chain emissions are significantly greater than our operational carbon footprint, with our
scope 3 emissions accounting for 97% of our total emissions (96% 2024). The calculation of emissions for our key scope 3 sources
is:
Business travel using the distance travelled and mode of travel we calculate the emissions associated with our business
travel. Emissions factors from DEFRA 2025 were used.
Purchased goods and services we used purchased data on the amount of spend of services purchased by the company.
EEIO factors were applied to financial spend categories using a spend-based analysis. We included primary data from our
supplier on our key data centres when they were available, e.g. AWS and Azure.
Scope 3 Emissions tCO
2
e
Category Status 2024
3
2025 Group YOY
1. Purchased goods and services Relevant, calculated 1,560 1,109 -29%
2. Capital goods Relevant, calculated 206 101 -51%
3. Fuel-and-energy-related activities (not included in Scope 1 or 2) Relevant, calculated 29 15 -49%
4. Upstream transportation and distribution Not applicable
5. Waste Generated in Operations Immaterial
6. Business Travel Relevant, calculated 1,472 1,549 5%
7. Employee Commuting Relevant, calculated 268 203 -24%
8. Upstream Leased Assets Not applicable
Total upstream Scope 3 3,535 2,977 -16%
9. Downstream Transportation and Distribution Not applicable -
10. Processing of Sold Products Not applicable
11. Use of Sold Products Not applicable
12. End-of-Life Treatment of Sold Products Not applicable
13. Downstream Leased Assets Not applicable
14. Franchises Not applicable
15. Investments Not applicable
Total Downstream Scope 3
Total Scope 3 3,535 2,977 -16%
3 2024 numbers have been restated due to improved data collection and quality.

Graphics
Task Force on Climate-Related Financial
Disclosures (TCFD) Reports
19
This is the Group’s fifth year of reporting against the recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures
(“TCFD”) and the Board is pleased to have further enhanced this reporting in line with the recommendations. The Board has
noted the requirement for mandatory climate-related disclosures arising from the Companies (Strategic Report) (Climate
Related Financial Disclosure) Regulations 2022, as well as FCA Listing Rule 6.6.6(8). Below we have set out our climate-related
financial disclosures fully consistent with 10 of the 11 TCFD recommendations and recommended disclosures as detailed
in ‘Recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures’, 2017, with use of additional guidance from
‘Implementing the Recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures’, 2021. Set out below are the
areas where the Group is consistent with the recommendations, or where it is not fully consistent, how it plans to achieve this:
Recommendation Recommended disclosures Reference Compliance/comments
Governance
Disclose the organisation’s
governance around climate-
related risks and opportunities
a) Describe the Board’s oversight of
climate-related risks and opportunities
Page 19 Fully consistent
b) Describe management’s role in assessing
and managing climate-related risks and
opportunities
Page 20 Fully consistent
Strategy
Disclose the actual and potential
impacts of climate-related
risks and opportunities on the
organisation’s businesses,
strategy, and financial planning
where such information is
material
a) Describe the climate-related risks and
opportunities the organisation has
identified over the short, medium, and long
term
Page 21 to 23 Fully consistent
b) Describe the impact of climate-related
risks and opportunities on the
organisation’s businesses, strategy, and
financial planning
Page 20 to 23 Fully consistent
c) Describe the resilience of the
organisation’s strategy, taking into
consideration different climate-related
scenarios, including a 2°C or lower scenario
Page 20 to 23 Fully consistent
Risk management
Disclose how the organisation
identifies, assesses, and manages
climate-related risks
a) Describe the organisation’s processes for
identifying and assessing climate-related
risks
Page 21 to 23 Fully consistent
b) Describe the organisation’s processes for
managing climate-related risks
Page 20 Fully consistent
c) Describe how processes for identifying,
assessing, and managing climate-related
risks are integrated into the organisation’s
overall risk management
Page 20 Fully consistent
Metrics and targets
Disclose the metrics and targets
used to assess and manage
relevant climate-related risks
and opportunities where such
information is material
a) Disclose the metrics used by the
organisation to assess climate- related risks
and opportunities in line with its strategy
and risk management process
Page 21 to 23 Fully consistent
b) Disclose scope 1, scope 2, and, if
appropriate, scope 3 greenhouse gas (GHG)
emissions, and the related risks
Page 16 to 18, 21
to 23
Fully consistent
c) Describe the targets used by the
organisation to manage climate-related
risks and opportunities and performance
against targets
Page 21 Not consistent. The Group has deferred target setting
pending methodology improvements.
Governance
Board level
The Board, with support from the Audit Committee, has overall responsibility for the management of climate-related matters,
including oversight of climate-related risks and opportunities. The Audit Committee is informed of climate-related risks and
opportunities, through reporting from the Senior Leadership Team (SLT) and through the review of its carbon footprint. The Board
considers relevant climate-related matters when discussing and guiding the strategy of the Group.
In 2025, climate-related matters, including discussions on emissions and oversight of other key sustainability initiatives, were
discussed bi-annually by the Audit Committee and reported to the Board. The Chair of the Audit Committee is the designated
Director with responsibility for ensuring that the Board meets its climate-related obligations and brings extensive sustainability
experience to this role. In Sara Dickinson’s executive role outside the group, she holds responsibility for environmental, social and
governance matters, and previously served on the sustainability committee whilst at BSI.
The Board is supported and informed on climate-related issues including progress against goals and targets through reporting by
the Company Secretary, the Executive Director and the Audit Committee, who monitor these issues.
Graphics
Task Force on Climate-Related Financial
Disclosures (TCFD) Reports
20
Management level
At management level, environmental, social and governance responsibilities, including climate-related matters, sit with the
Group’s Senior Leadership Team. The Senior Leadership Team is led by Alex Curran, Chief Executive Officer, and is responsible for
providing oversight of sustainability initiatives at an operational level. The Senior Leadership Team contributes to the identification,
assessment, and mitigation of climate-related risk. The Senior Leadership team is informed about climate-related issues at its
meetings through reporting from the Company Secretary.
Risk management
The Group has considered all risk and opportunity categories outlined in the TCFD guidance, including existing and emerging
regulatory requirements. However, not all risk categories are applicable or material to the business.
During the year, climate-related risks and opportunities were assessed in the context of the Group’s existing risk management
processes (as detailed on pages 24 to 28 and pages 40 to 41) to allow for their relative significance to be determined. The climate-
related risk assessment has been carried out over the following time horizons:
Short-term: Now to 2026: Aligns with the Group’s shortest office leases.
Medium-term: 2026 to 2029: Aligns with the Group’s medium-term office leases.
Long-term: 2029 to 2050: Aligns to the UK Government’s Net Zero pledge and the longer-term physical impacts of
climate change.
When determining the financial impact of our identified climate-related risks, a materiality threshold has been used that is
consistent with the external audit materiality level. This level is set as 4.8% of adjusted profit before tax and all of our identified
climate-related risks are estimated to fall below this level. As the Group’s operations have a relatively limited impact upon the
environment, climate change was not identified as an emerging or material risk in the context of the Group’s activities.
The Audit Committee twice yearly reviews and documents principal and emerging risks, including climate change. This assessment
takes into consideration the likelihood and potential impact of each risk, allowing the materiality of the risks and opportunities to
be determined and identifying those risks which need further investigation. The outcomes of these reviews were cascaded to the
Senior Leadership Team through regular SLT meetings. Please see Principal Risks on pages 24 to 28 for more information on the
Group’s risk management processes.
Strategy
The Group recognises the significant potential impact of climate change on environmental and economic systems. However, as a
technology business, its climate exposure is low, and the impact of identified climate-related risks is limited.
Three climate-related scenarios have been selected to understand the impact of climate change on the Group’s strategy. The
three scenarios have been chosen to provide a variety of situations to which climate change could impact our company and are
as follows:
Net Zero 2050 (NZE)
1
: Low carbon scenario that meets the TCFD’s requirement of a below 2°C scenario.
Stated Policies Scenario (STEPS): Medium carbon scenario which represents the roll forward of announced policies.
SSP5-8.5
2
: Very high emissions scenario which includes extreme physical climate risks with limited global mitigation.
Each of the Group’s climate-related risks and opportunities have been analysed and quantified under the three scenarios in line
with definitions for risk impact outlined above and the following assumptions and estimates:
1. Impacts are to be considered in the context of current financial performance and prices.
2. Gross impacts are assumed to occur without the company responding with any mitigation actions, which would reduce the
impact of risks.
3. Impacts are modelled to occur in a linear fashion, when in practice dramatic climate-related impacts may occur suddenly
after tipping points are breached.
4. The analysis considers each risk and scenario in isolation, when in practice climate-related risks may occur in parallel as part
of a wider set of potential global impacts.
5. Carbon prices are determined with reference to information from the International Energy Agency.
6. No material changes in business model, locations, or operations.
1. "https://www.iea.org/reports/world-energy-outlook-2025" World Energy Outlook 2025, IEA, Paris.
2. IPCC, 2023:
Climate Change 2023: Synthesis Report
. Contribution of Working Groups I, II and III to the Sixth Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, Geneva, Switzerland.
Graphics
21
The Group has concluded that the business is resilient to climate change. The need for a fundamental change to business strategy
or additional spending because of climate change is unlikely to occur. The Group will, however, continue to develop its analysis as
new data is made available both internally and externally, and it will continue to monitor its climate exposures and action plans
through its risk management framework and governance structure.
Climate-related Risks
Three climate-related risks that could have a limited financial impact on the organisation have been identified.
Risk 1. Carbon pricing in the value chain
2. Reputational risks linked to sustainability
performance & reporting
3. Depending on third parties and
technology to decarbonise
Type Transition (current and emerging regulation) Transition (market policy and legal) Transition (Technology)
Area Upstream Own operations Upstream and operations
Primary
potential
financial
impact
Increased cost of purchased goods and
services
Reputation, higher cost of capital, lower
business opportunities
Reputation, higher cost of capital, lower
business opportunities
Time horizon Medium term Medium term Medium term
Likelihood Likely Likely Likely
Impact Low Low Low
Location or
service most
impacted
Purchased goods and services Across the Group Across the Group
Metrics used
to track risks
Scope 3 emissions Scope 1 and 2 emissions; external
environmental, social and governance
ratings.
Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions.
Risk
description
and
mitigation
The Group carried out its initial full scope 3
footprint analysis in 2023 to fully understand
its upstream emissions exposures. The
Group’s principal value chain emissions
originate from our business travel and
purchased goods and services. As suppliers
come under carbon pricing mechanisms,
or carbon border adjustments, this could
result in the supplier passing on the added
cost from the carbon tax. There is comfort
that several of our primary data centres
have targets to be net zero by 2040 at the
latest, meaning that a significant portion
of our scope 3 emissions footprint will be
offset with the achievement of these targets.
In addition, the data centre providers also
have well established strategies and policies
on the environment and impact of climate
change including certifications such as
ISO 14001 and ISO 5001. The Group has also
carried out several initiatives to reduce our
scope 3 emission exposure. These include
hybrid working to reduce commuting
emissions and choosing data centres and
cloud infrastructure providers which are
committed to purchasing electricity from
renewable sources. This potential risk would
be greater under the Net Zero 2050 scenario.
Investors and financial institutions continue
to integrate sustainability and climate-related
criteria into their assessments, maintaining
ongoing expectations for transparent
climate-related disclosure and performance.
This is likely to be of greater risk under
the net zero 2050 scenario. Investors are
aligning their portfolios to net zero as well as
other environmental, social and governance
metrics and companies face disinvestment
if plans are insufficient. Our current and
potential future customers are increasingly
interested to understand our approach
to environmental, social, and governance
matters. Currently, our lenders have not
tied our debt to sustainability criteria, but
we will continue to monitor this to ensure
we are in line with their expectations on
climate-related performance. The Group’s
current debt levels are also relatively low,
and debt facilities have been secured in the
medium term. We also continue to monitor
our clients’ and our employees’ expectations
in this area.
The ability of Aptitude to decarbonise both
our operations and supply chain is partially
reliant on third parties and technologies
that are still being developed. Our ability to
decarbonise our operations is dependent on
grid decarbonisation and renewable energy
availability. As our office spaces are leased,
we cannot install onsite renewable energy
but are taking other steps where appropriate
to reduce our emissions. Decarbonisation of
our value chain is reliant on both purchased
goods and services and business travel. We
are therefore dependent on the actions and
progress of our key suppliers to decarbonise
the goods and services we procure from
them. However, a high proportion of the
Group’s data centres already have net zero
targets, helping to mitigate significant value
chain emissions exposure.
Reduction in business travel is dependent
on technological developments in the
aviation industry, which is out of our control.
However, we have a Group policy on the use
and class of flights for business travel which
helps reduce emissions from business travel.
Consideration of other climate-related risks
The following risks were identified through a physical climate risk assessment but were deemed immaterial due to the Group’s
operational profile and adaptive capacity.
Graphics
Task Force on Climate-Related Financial
Disclosures (TCFD) Reports
22
Physical risks (acute and chronic)
While certain hazards (including heat humidity stress, cold stress, precipitation stress, and water scarcity) are projected to increase
in specific geographies under higher-emissions climate scenarios (including SSP5-8.5), these risks were discounted as immaterial
for the Group for the following reasons:
a) All Group sites are office-based, with no reliance on climate-sensitive ground-level, outdoor, or process-dependent
operations, significantly limiting physical exposure to climate hazards such as flooding, heat stress, drought, or water scarcity.
Additionally, established work-from-home capabilities provide operational resilience.
b) Operational water use is low and non-critical, and office operations are not dependent on water availability for
business continuity.
c) Several hazards are assessed as low risk across all sites, including river flooding, heat stress, fire weather stress, and drought
stress, and therefore do not present a material risk to operations under assessed scenarios.
d) Exposure to insurance companies as clients which themselves could be at risk from high pay-outs due to climate-related
events, such as storms or flooding.
Transitional risks:
e) Exposure to carbon pricing in own operations. As a technology company, the Group’s operations are not carbon intensive,
which limits its exposure to carbon price risks in its operations.
Climate-related Opportunities
The following climate-related opportunities have been identified:
Opportunity
1. Zero emission energy
(e.g. self- generation, Renewal Energy Guarantees
of Origin and Power Purchasing Agreements)
2. Managing resource efficiency
(energy, resource and water efficiencies)
Type Energy source Resource efficiency
Area Operations Operations
Primary potential financial impact Decreased costs Decreased costs
Time horizon Medium-term Medium-term
Likelihood Likely Very likely
Impact Medium-low Medium
Location or service most impacted Office buildings Office buildings
Metrics used to track risks % renewable energy usage Energy and waste consumption
Opportunity description and strategy to
capitalise
Transitioning to renewable electricity sources
(either via self-generation or through contracted
electricity supply from power purchase agreements
and Energy Attribute Certificates (EACs)) can help
in reducing market-based scope 2 emissions to
zero. Investment in self-generation would likely be
unfeasible given the Group’s relatively short-term
lease agreements and energy requirements. We
assume the ability to find EAC’s at our key offices
in the future will be high. The Group continues
to prioritise office locations with high energy
efficiency and access to self-generated renewable
energy facilities, e.g. solar panels, when looking for
new office space. This opportunity will be greater
under the Net Zero 2050 scenario.
Improvements of energy efficiency and reduction
of energy consumption with the involvement of
our landlords will provide opportunities. In 2024,
we moved our Poland office into a new space
that is LEED Platinum for building categories such
as water and energy efficiency as well as being
WELL certified. Going forward, the selection of any
new or replacement office spaces in the Group’s
other regions will further take sustainability
considerations into account. This opportunity will
be greater under the Net Zero 2050 scenario.
Metrics and targets
We report on our scope 1, 2, and 3 emissions. Our carbon footprint is calculated using methodologies consistent with the
Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Protocol: A Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard, with additional guidance from the GHG Protocol
Corporate Value Chain (Scope 3) Accounting and Reporting Standard and the GHG Protocol Technical Guidance for Calculating
Scope 3 Emissions, as required.
The Group recognises that global warming is driving climate change and that governments, industry and society need to act to
mitigate the effects. While the Group’s carbon emissions are relatively low, the Board remains fully committed to continuing
to reduce its scope 1 and scope 2 emissions over time and will seek to do this by actively encouraging its landlords to switch to
renewable energy sources and by continuing to consider energy efficiency when selecting any future office premises.
Graphics
23
In 2025, we updated our scope 3 emissions footprint calculation to reflect the latest reporting year. The results are detailed
on page 18. In 2025, scope 3 accounted for 98% of our total footprint (market-based), with business travel (52% of scope 3)
and purchased goods and services (37% of scope 3) being the most significant contributors. Consistent with previous years, we
calculated all applicable scope 3 categories for our 2025 footprint. Nine scope 3 categories are not applicable to our company. The
waste generated in the operations category was excluded from our footprint based on immateriality.
While the Group recognises the importance of setting meaningful emissions reduction targets, it has been determined that
improvements to its emissions reporting methodology are required before robust, comparable, and decision-useful targets can be
established. During the first half of 2026, the Group intends to undertake a more detailed review of its emissions data, boundary
definitions, and calculation methodologies to assess how best to strengthen the quality of its reporting. Following this review, the
Board will consider the appropriate approach to emissions target setting and determine how the Group should proceed.
Graphics
Principal Risks
24
The management of the business and the execution of the Group’s strategy are subject to several risks. The Board has delegated
authority to the Audit Committee to assess the Group’s principal and emerging risks, and the Board takes appropriate steps to
monitor these risks and mitigate them where feasible.
The Board receives updates on principal and potential emerging risks that could threaten the Group’s performance or achievement
of its strategic objectives. The Audit Committee identifies areas for internal audit review, where this is felt to be appropriate
to help further understand and mitigate areas of risk and to test the effectiveness of internal controls and risk management
frameworks. Further information on this is contained in the report of the Audit Committee on pages 39 to 44.
Considering all known risks that have the potential to impact the Group’s performance and strategy, the following represents the
principal and emerging risks as recognised by the Board as at 7 April 2026 and how these are mitigated:
Principal Risk Explanation Mitigating Action Trend
Product, Engineering & Design The Group’s future performance will depend on the
successful development, introduction, and market
acceptance of new, enhanced products and AI-native
capabilities. These products must address the requirements
of current and future customers to be able to carry out
their key finance and business processes in a timely and
cost-effective manner. The products must also respond
effectively to industry, regulatory and technological
changes including advances in artificial intelligence. Failure
to do so may have significant impacts on the current and
future profitability of the Group.
The Group continues the process of completing an
organizational transformation to capitalise on the Fynapse
application.
Traction for Fynapse is growing, with wins secured during
the period across new clients and our installed base, and
the acceleration of our partner strategy is driving positive
pipeline progression.
Plans for future products are developed in close liaison
with current and potential clients and partners and
through monitoring of changes in the business and market
requirements supported by investment governance
and ROI assessment. AI governance, model validation
and secure development lifecycle controls have been
implemented to manage AI deployment.
Customer Experience &
Retention
The Group’s ability to attract and retain customers is
dependent on the provision of reliable high-quality
products and excellent service.
The Group’s products are typically critical to our customers’
business operations and information systems.
Failure to provide a good customer experience can result in
increased levels of customer churn and significantly impact
the financial performance and reputation of the Group.
Risk relates to wider macro-economic environments and,
increasing pressure on businesses to review software cost
base.
The Company’s key leadership team members are
collectively responsible for the end-to-end client lifecycle,
including onboarding, integration, implementation, and
ongoing client support.
Specialist teams across services, support, and account
management are structured to ensure clients receive the
appropriate expertise at each stage of their journey.
The Chief Product & Technology Officer is responsible
for ensuring the reliability, security, and scalability of the
technology that underpins the client's experience.
Customer health metrics, retention analytics, and renewal
pipelines are regularly reviewed by Executive Management
to ensure proactive management of client relationships and
long-term customer success.
People, Talent & Performance The Group’s ability to innovate, deliver client
implementations and maintain quality products depends
on attracting, developing and retaining highly skilled
employees and effective leadership. Failure to recruit or
retain individuals with the required technical, commercial
and leadership capabilities could impact product
development, service delivery and client relationships.
The loss of key personnel or rapid business growth may
also place pressure on organisational capacity and delivery
capability.
The Group maintains a structured people strategy focused
on attracting and retaining high-quality talent. Recruitment
processes are designed to identify individuals with the skills
and behaviours required to support the Group’s growth.
Investment in training, professional development and
career progression supports capability development and
employee retention. Succession planning and leadership
development programmes are in place to strengthen
management capability and reduce reliance on key
individuals.
Key Partnerships & Alliances Aptitude has in place key partnerships, including
technology partnerships and several major advisory and
systems integrator firms to support its go-to-market
strategy.
Failures in any of these key partnerships could impact the
Group financially and reputationally and negatively impact
our clients.
The Group has established a structured process for
evaluating and selecting new partners to support the
delivery of its products and services. This process is
designed to ensure that partners have an appropriate
understanding of Aptitude’s solutions and the client
engagement lifecycle.
Training and enablement programmes are provided to keep
partners informed of product developments and evolving
delivery practices. While partner onboarding continues to
develop, the Group has made progress in strengthening
engagement with a set of key managed partners, with
clearer plans, improved pipeline visibility and more regular
operational alignment.
A dedicated Partnerships team works closely with named
partners and internal teams to support partner capability
development, coordinate opportunities and ensure
alignment around shared objectives.
Graphics
25
Principal Risk Explanation Mitigating Action Trend
Macro-Economic Conditions The Group operates in ever changing economic conditions
which can impact the demand for and price of its products,
the cost of its purchased goods and services and labour
costs.
Failure to appropriately manage these impacts could affect
the Group’s current and future profitability.
Increased risk is in relation to US economic policy,
particularly in relation to tariffs as well as broader
geopolitical tensions and global conflicts that may affect
economic stability and business investment.
Appropriate commercial arrangements are put in
place with customers, including annual license fees or
subscription arrangements to provide resilience against the
full effects of market deterioration.
The Group is also able to partially mitigate economic risk
through operating in multiple geographic regions and
across a number of business sectors.
Commercial modelling is undertaken to assess the impact
of inflationary increases, and the Group is able to reduce
the exposure in its customer contracts with the majority
allowing for inflationary increases to be applied annually.
Information Security and Data
Privacy
The Group’s products require the processing of confidential
client data including, for a number of products, material
non-public financial data and personal data. Additionally,
the eSuite product requires processing of customer
subscriber personal data, including payment card data.
Failure to appropriately protect this data could have
significant financial, regulatory, and reputational
consequences for the Group.
Increased risk relates to heightened sensitivity regarding
data security and the emergence of AI technologies, as well
as more sophisticated risks to data security.
The Group has a strong focus on all aspects of information
security – people, processes and technology.
Our Information Security Management System (ISMS) is
ISO 27001:2022 certified, and we follow formal processes
for all aspects of information security including building
secure systems to prevent cyber-attacks and protect our
information security assets, monitoring and detecting
threats and responding to the same as well as applying the
required governance and compliance processes.
We also have formal processes for key IS domains including
secure systems build, IT asset management, vulnerability
management, cyber threat management, incident
response, BCP/DR and personnel security management. In
addition to ISO 27001:2022, we also provide SOC reports to
SaaS clients to support client compliance processes as well
as PCI-DSS certification for eSuite clients.
The Group implemented an automated security monitoring
platform to enhance continuous monitoring of security
controls, support ongoing compliance with recognised
security frameworks, and strengthen oversight of both
third-party and internal security controls.
Risks emanating from cyber warfare, ransomware attacks,
changing regulations, sanctions and changes in information
security frameworks are assessed and mitigating action
plans are formally prepared and presented. These
assessments are regularly reviewed by the Information
Security Committee. The Board is also provided with
regular updates regarding our information security posture
and risks.
For personal data protection, we have formal privacy
and compliance management processes including
privacy risk assessment, secure systems build, GDPR and
CCPA compliance processes, client data categorization,
protection and deletion processes. Where the Group acts
as a processor for client personal data, we work closely
with clients to ensure compliance with privacy laws.
Liquidity & Financing The Group maintains a strong balance sheet and
cash position, with cash balances of £29.6 million at
31 December 2025 (2024: £30.4 million). The business is
primarily funded through cash generated from operations,
with external financing arrangements providing additional
flexibility to support working capital requirements and
strategic initiatives. In October 2025, the Group refinanced
its previous banking facilities with Bank of Ireland and
entered into a new senior secured facility agreement
with HSBC UK Bank plc comprising a £6.0 million term
loan and a £5.0 million revolving credit facility. While the
Group currently maintains significant liquidity headroom,
it remains exposed to risks including covenant compliance,
refinancing risk at maturity and changes in interest rates
that could affect the cost of borrowing.
The Group maintains committed banking facilities to
support working capital and provide financial flexibility.
Liquidity forecasts and covenant compliance are monitored
regularly by Finance Leadership and the Chief Executive
Officer and reviewed by the Board. The Group maintains
regular dialogue with its lending banks and monitors
covenant headroom and financing maturity profiles.
Surplus cash is held with established financial institutions.
The Group also utilises foreign exchange hedging
arrangements to manage exposures arising from its
international operations.
Graphics
Principal Risks
26
Principal Risk Explanation Mitigating Action Trend
Geopolitical Risk The Group has operations in a number of countries and
seeks to mitigate any risks to its employees arising from
conflicts or other geopolitical incidents.
As a result of our geographic spread, the Group is exposed
to a range of political, economic, regulatory, social and
tax environments. Policies or laws, involving the countries
in which we operate, may change in a manner that may
be adverse for the Group, even those with stable political
environments.
Risks continue to be monitored due to ongoing conflicts in
Ukraine and Middle East, as well as tariff introductions by
large trading blocks.
The Group remains alert to geopolitical risks and has in
place business contingency plans which are overseen by
the Board. These plans are developed on an ongoing basis
in readiness for any need to implement.
Environmental, social and
governance (ESG)
Aptitude is committed to being a responsible business
and operates in a sustainable manner for all of our
stakeholders. Failure to operate in a way that appropriately
manages our impacts on the environment and our
communities may negatively impact our reputation as a
responsible business.
The Board oversees the Group’s approach to responsible
business practices and monitors progress against its
environmental and social commitments. The Chair of the
Audit Committee oversees compliance with the Group’s
climate-related reporting obligations. Further information
on the Group’s ESG strategy and activities is provided in the
Responsible Business Report on pages 16 to 18.
In undertaking this review of its principal risks, the Board also considered other potential risks and concluded that they were not
considered to be principal risks. The Board, with the support of the Audit Committee, will continue to review potential emerging
risks, and update its principal risks as necessary.
Graphics
Going Concern & Viability Statement
27
In accordance with Provision 31 of the 2024 UK Corporate Governance Code (“the Code”), the Directors have assessed the
prospects of the Group over a longer period than the 12 months required by the “Going Concern” provision as part of our viability
review set out below. The Board determined that it would be reasonable to perform a review of the Group’s cash flows and
other key financial indicators over a period of three years and considered this appropriate given the period aligns the Group’s
viability statement with its planning time horizon in respect of its three-year strategic plan and is suitable given the nature and
investment cycle of a technology business. Cash flows over this period have a relatively high degree of predictability, as the
business's software revenues as a proportion of total revenue continues to improve. Projections beyond this period become less
reliable given the inherent uncertainty of technology and market developments, supplemented by the uncertainties surrounding
the global economy. The Directors have no reason to believe the Group would not be viable over a longer period. However, due to
this uncertainty, the Directors consider a three-year period to be appropriate in forming a reasonable expectation on the Group’s
longer-term viability.
In forming a viability statement, the Directors carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks and uncertainties that could
impair the solvency and liquidity of the Group. This is based on the Group’s current position, its strategy, and associated principal
risks with scenarios including an assessment of the Group’s longer-term prospects. The Group retains significant cash balances
benefiting from its annual licence fee or subscription model in which the majority of its customers pay annually in advance.
Scenario models are reviewed by the Board and the Audit Committee and are a foundation for the Group’s strategic plan. The
financial forecasts contained in the plan make certain assumptions about the uptake of new annual licences and subscriptions and
the performance of other core revenue streams. As part of the assessment the Group stress tests the plan using various scenarios.
To achieve this, management reviewed the principal risks and considered which might threaten the Group’s viability. Across each
of the scenarios tested, the Group has also not factored in any structural changes to its cost base being made to ensure it remains
viable. It was therefore determined that none of the individual risks would in isolation compromise the Group’s viability, and so
several different severe scenarios were considered where the principal risks arose in combination.
The scenarios considered to be the most significant in performing the assessment of viability and the combination of principal
risks involved are detailed in the scenario modelling section on page 28, all of which are considered extremely remote. In addition,
the Group sets out separate assessments of why the Group believes that these do not represent risks which might threaten the
viability of the Group.
Principal risks
The risk that the Group fails to comply with its contractual and legal obligations, including those relating to data confidentiality,
resulting in damages, regulatory penalties and fines.
The risk that the Group utilises a significant proportion of its existing cash reserves to implement an acquisition strategy
which does not yield the expected return on investment.
The risk that the Group decides to perform a significant return of value to shareholders immediately prior to a steep downturn
in performance.
The risk of the business fails to attract new customers or retain existing customers as a result of weaknesses within its product
suite or service delivery model.
The risk of insolvency of key banking counterparties used by the Group could lead to the loss of all, or part of the cash held
with any such counterparty.
Mitigations
The Group operates a strong control environment which includes close oversight by management and the Board on all key
matters. Where required, this includes the use of external advisers and insurance cover which may mitigate the impact of a
possible material breach.
The Group has significant acquisition experience following the completion of seven acquisitions since 2014, including the
acquisition of MPP Global Solutions Limited on 9 October 2021. Any future opportunities would need to satisfy the Group’s
strict criteria for complementary technologies which could enhance Aptitude’s product suite. Furthermore, appropriate due
diligence on any potential acquisitions is performed with findings presented to the Board.
The Group has substantial levels of future contracted revenue visibility and retains significant cash balances benefitting
from its long-term annual license and subscription model in which the overwhelming majority of its customers pay annually
in advance.
The business currently operates with a moderate level of debt financing in place. The Group’s existing debt facility provides
access to additional financing which would assist in covering short-term cash flows, if necessary.
Graphics
Going Concern & Viability Statement
28
The Group continues to invest in the development of its key growth driver, Fynapse, to ensure it capitalises on market
opportunities and evolves as a fully AI-enabled platform, while maintaining the wider product suite at a level that remains
competitive and aligned with evolving customer requirements.
Cash conservation measures could include a review of the Group’s dividend policy along with the flexibility to implement a
number of cost reduction measures.
The Group’s cash deposits are always held across at least two financial institutions.
Geopolitical developments
The Group continues to monitor the situation in Ukraine, the Middle East and Taiwan closely. The business has no facilities or
dependencies in those regions, but in view of its mainland Europe operations, business contingency planning has been undertaken
to mitigate any potential disruption to the Group’s operations that might result should there be an escalation of the Ukraine
conflict into other European countries or from wider instability in the Middle East.
Future inflation increases
The Group monitors inflation levels and plans for any significant future cost increases that might arise. Increasing inflation could
have an impact on the Group’s margins in the short term, because the Group’s ability to recover these increased costs from its
customer base would not take immediate effect and would depend upon the commercial terms agreed with its customers.
Climate-related risk
In accordance with the recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (“TCFD”), the Group has
assessed the potential impact of climate-related risk on its operations and determined these to be low. Full details of how the
Group complies with TCFD recommendations can be found on pages 19 to 23.
Other risks
Whilst other risks were considered in respect of a new market disruptor, the collapse of new business activity and defaulting on
the loan facility, these were not considered as severe as the scenarios outlined above given the level of future contracted revenue
visibility and cash generation achieved through the Group’s multi-year annual licence and subscription model, combined with the
magnitude of the Group’s variable cost base.
Scenario modelling
The likelihood of each principal risk occurring, and the potential impact was modelled across various scenarios by management
who evaluated the possible consequences, primarily through a reduction in operating profit, ranging from a reduction of 50% to
70%, and net cash in-flows. These impacts were based on similar events in the public domain and internal estimates. The Directors
reviewed and discussed the process undertaken by management, and also reviewed the results of reverse stress testing which
illustrated the reduction in operating profit, across a three-year period, that would be required for the Group to either breach its
external loan covenants, or exhaust all available cash. Based on the reverse stress test assessment, the Group concluded that total
revenue of £96 million would be required over the next three years (an average of £32 million per annum). Therefore the current
level of future contracted revenue (the total of all future contracted revenues as of 31 December 2025), totalling £83 million,
would only need to be supplemented by £13 million of revenue across the three years assessed, realised from new business
or across the base, for the group to continue to operate under such a severe scenario. This level of revenue is well below both
planned levels and historic revenue performance. Aptitude’s recurring software model includes auto-renewal clauses for most
customers, and much of the additional revenue is expected to be generated from existing customers, such that the £83 million
contracted revenue at 31 December 2025 will increase with auto-renewals. Across each of the scenarios tested, no adjustments
were made to the Group’s cost base to ensure the business remains viable.
Based on the results of the review, the Directors confirm that they have a reasonable expectation that the Group will continue to
operate and meet its liabilities, as they fall due, for the next three years. The Directors’ assessment has been made with reference
to the Group’s current position and prospects, the Group’s current strategy, the Board’s current risk appetite, and the Group’s
principal risks, and how these are managed. The Group retains significant cash balances benefiting from its annual licence and
subscription model in which the overwhelming majority of its customers pay annually in advance.
The Strategic Report comprising pages 1 to 28 and 81 to 86 was approved by the Board on 7 April 2026.
Alex Curran
Chief Executive Officer
Graphics
The Board
29
Ivan Martin
Non-Executive Chairman
Committee Membership
Chair of the Nomination Committee
Member of the Remuneration Committee
Ivan Martin was appointed to the Board on 1 January 2016 and assumed the
role of Non-Executive Chairman on 4 March 2016.
Ivan has previously held a number of significant Executive and Non-Executive
positions in both the Technology and Financial Services sectors having been
Non-Executive Chairman of Xceptor, a London-based international software
business which was sold by CBPE Capital to Astorg Partners, Chief Executive
Officer of Misys Banking and Capital Markets and a main board member of
Misys plc. He was also Chairman of FDM Group from 2006 to 2019, during
which time he oversaw the growth and evolution of this company from an
AIM listing to a FTSE 250 member valued at over £1 billion.
Key external appointments
Non-Executive Chairman of Nebula Cloud Limited (formerly known as
TelcoSwitch), a privately owned provider of Unified Communications
Software as a Service.
Member of Wulstan Capital LLP and Parch Three Estates LLP, being
commercial property investment vehicles.
Alex Curran
Chief Executive Officer
Alex Curran was appointed to Board as Acting CEO on 12 July 2023 and
subsequently appointed as CEO on 30 November 2023.
Alex joined Aptitude Software in 2008 and she has held several senior roles
within the Group, including leading the North American business since July
2019.
Key external appointments
Non-executive director of Checkit plc.
Male
25%
75%
Female
Board Gender Diversity¹
1
1
1
Board Tenure¹
1
> 7 years > 3 years > 1 year < 1 year
1. Data as at 31 December 2025.
Graphics
The Board
30
Paula Dowdy
Non-Executive Director
Committee Membership
Chair of Remuneration Committee
Member of the Audit Committee
Member of the Nomination Committee
Paula Dowdy was appointed to the Board as a non-executive director,
senior independent director, and Chair of the Renumeration Committee on
28 May 2025.
Paula has spent most of her career in commercial and general management
roles spanning diverse high growth industries: telecoms, technology,
software, and life sciences. Most recently she was Senior Vice President of
Illumina, Inc.’s EMEA business, doubling the revenue to over $1 billion. She
also spent over 20 years at Cisco Systems, Inc. in US, UK, and global roles,
including positions as Senior Vice President both in Services for EMEA and
Software globally.
Paula has served on boards in the US, UK, and Europe with both private
and public companies. Her portfolio career began with the appointment
as Non-Executive Director at AVEVA Group plc, a FTSE 100 member from
2019 - 2023. She subsequently served on the board of EQT’s SPT Labtech as
a Non-Executive Director from 2023-2025.
Key external appointments
Board Director – Quantum-SI, Inc.
Non-Executive Director – Sensio AS. A Nordic Capital.
Sara Dickinson
Non-Executive Director
Committee Membership
Chair of Audit Committee
Member of the Remuneration Committee
Member of the Nomination Committee
Sara Dickinson was appointed to the Board as a Non-Executive Director
on 1 October 2021 and assumed the role of Chair of the Audit Committee
on 16 March 2022. Sara has significant experience of external and internal
financial governance and reporting including ESG requirements and
therefore is also the designated Director for ensuring that the Board meets
its climate-related reporting obligations.
Sara has over 30 years of financial experience, as well as significant
knowledge of digital finance processes and finance transformation. Prior
to joining Boldyn Networks, Sara was Chief Finance Officer of BSI where she
drove successful finance and companywide transformation. Previous roles
include Senior Vice President at Expedia Inc; and Non-Executive Director
and Chair of the Finance Committee of A2Dominion, a residential property
group with a debt listing on the London Stock Exchange. Sara’s other
experience includes Commercial Finance Director at Costa Coffee, Group
Financial Controller for Sage Group plc and Vice President and European
Chief Financial Officer of ebookers.
Key external appointment
Chief Financial Officer of Boldyn Networks Global Limited.
Graphics
Governance Framework
31
Board
The role of the Board is to promote the long-term success of Aptitude by
defining a clear purpose and overseeing the Group’s strategy to deliver
sustainable value to shareholders and other stakeholders.
The Board delegates certain matters to its three principal Committees:
Nomination Committee
Oversees the composition of
the Board and Committees
and considers succession
planning and diversity,
making recommendations
to the Board.
Page 37
Audit Committee
Ensures the integrity of the
Group’s financial reporting,
systems and controls.
Oversight of risk
management process.
Reviews and monitors
climate change disclosures
and related ESG financial
reporting obligations.
Monitors the Group’s
cyber resilience.
Ensures effectiveness of
the external auditor.
Page 39
Remuneration
Committee
Determines the remuneration
and benefits of the Executive
Directors and oversees
remuneration arrangements
for the Senior Leadership
Team, as well as monitoring
remuneration policies for the
wider workforce.
Page 45
Senior Leadership Team
The Senior Leadership Team, led by the Chief Executive Officer, is responsible for the execution of
the Group’s strategy, and the day-to-day management of the business.
Graphics
Board Governance
32
Compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code
Having equity shares admitted to listing in the commercial companies category under the UK Listing Rules, and in respect of the
financial year ended 31 December 2025, the Company reports in accordance with the 2024 UK Corporate Governance Code (the
“2024 Code”).
The 2024 Code sets out standards of good practice in relation to the following principles:
I) Board leadership and company purpose;
II) Division of responsibilities;
III) Composition, succession and evaluation;
IV) Audit, risk and internal control; and
V) Remuneration.
Save as explained below, the Company has complied with the provisions of the 2024 Code (published by the Financial Reporting
Council and available at www.frc.org.uk) for the year ended 31 December 2025.
Internal Audit
The Company does not currently operate a standalone internal audit function. The Board considers that, given the size, nature and
complexity of the Group’s operations, the existing framework of internal controls, together with management assurance, selected
third party audits, and the statutory external audit, provides an appropriate level of oversight.
The need for an internal audit function is formally considered by the Audit Committee at each meeting as a standing agenda item.
The Board will continue to keep this under regular review as the Group evolves.
Chair Tenure
The Chair has served on the Board for more than nine years and is therefore not considered independent under the Code. The
Board considers that the Chair continues to provide effective leadership and governance, drawing on deep knowledge of the
business and its strategic priorities.
In light of the Strategic Review, the Board has concluded that it is appropriate to extend the Chair's tenure as Non-Executive Chair
until its conclusion.
The reports of the Nomination Committee (pages 37 and 38), the Audit Committee (pages 39 to 44), and the Remuneration
Committee (pages 45 to 66) are incorporated into this report by reference.
The following pages explain the Company’s approach to Corporate Governance and how the Board and its Committees have
fulfilled their responsibilities to ensure robust governance is embedded within the business to support the long-term sustainable
success of the Group.
The Board
Leadership and Company Purpose
Led by our Chairman, Ivan Martin, the Board provides the leadership of the Company. It is collectively responsible and accountable
to shareholders for the Company’s long-term success, strategy, values, culture, and overall governance and management. The
skills and experience of each of the Board members is provided on pages 29 to 30 and the governance framework (see page 31)
ensures good governance practices across the Group. The schedule of matters reserved to the Board is regularly reviewed and can
be found on the Company’s website www.aptitudesoftware.com.
The Board of Directors meets regularly to review strategic, operational, and financial matters. At each scheduled meeting, the
Group’s performance is assessed against its targets and objectives, with reference to reports and KPIs prepared by management.
The Company’s principal risks are set out on pages 24 to 26 and steps are in place to monitor and mitigate these risks. Information
is supplied to the Board in advance of meetings, and the Chairman ensures that all Directors are properly briefed on the matters
being discussed. The Board also receives presentations by members of senior management on different areas of the Group’s
business. To ensure that the Group’s strategic objectives and performance are clearly communicated to all employees, the CEO
issues weekly emails and holds weekly “All Hands” sessions, which present current business priorities and provide a platform for
employees to ask questions.
The Board also oversees the Group’s culture to ensure alignment with the corporate purpose, mission, vision and values (see
page 14). A suite of policies, which are in line with the values and culture to support the Group’s operations, are in place and
Graphics
33
accessible by all employees. The Board, as a whole, reviews engagement activities with the wider workforce. Paula Dowdy is
the designated Senior independent Non-Executive Director with responsibility for overseeing wider workforce engagement, and
employees can raise any concerns with her.
The Chairman and the Executive Directors maintain regular engagement with shareholders through presentations on the annual
and interim results, on significant matters relating to strategy and governance, and at the Annual General Meeting. In addition,
individual meetings are also held with shareholders and potential investors on request, including meetings with other Non-
Executive Directors where appropriate. The Remuneration Committee Chair ensures that major investors are consulted on key
remuneration matters and responds to any investor questions on remuneration.
In addition to its shareholders, the Group’s other key stakeholders and steps taken to engage with them are described on pages 11
and 12. The chairs of the Remuneration, Audit, and Nomination Committees make themselves available to discuss significant
matters related to their areas of responsibility.
Activities of the Board during 2025
Agendas for each Board meeting focus on the performance of the Company, both financially and operationally through
presentations by the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and finance function. Senior management are also invited to present key topics
of interest to the Board.
This year, the Board’s activities have included:
consideration of changes to the composition of the Board, its Committee and the Senior Leadership Team;
assessing initiatives on people and leadership;
implementing a reorganisation of the Company’s structure;
reviewing employee engagement scores and attrition;
approving the annual budget and trading updates;
reviewing the Company’s banking arrangements; and
engaging with shareholders on governance, remuneration, succession planning, and climate-related matters.
Division of Responsibilities
The role of individual Directors
The Board consists of two independent Non-Executive Directors, one Non-Executive Director and one Executive Director all of
whom act with integrity, lead by example, and promote the Group’s culture. Each Non-Executive Director has relevant experience
supporting the Group’s strategy and operations, and all provide challenge and guidance to management. The skills and experience
of each of the directors are provided within their biographies on pages 29 to 30.
The Chairman, Ivan Martin, is responsible for setting the Board’s agenda in consultation with the Company Secretary, and ensuring
that the Board fulfils its duties effectively. He ensures that the Board receives accurate, timely and clear information in advance of
Board meetings (and on an ongoing basis) to enable the Board to carry out its role effectively.
He promotes a culture of openness and debate, both inside and outside of the boardroom, and oversees constructive relationships
between Executive and Non-Executive Directors. The Chairman is also responsible for ensuring effective communication between
the Group and its shareholders and provides feedback to Executive Director and the Company Secretary where appropriate.
Non-Executive Directors are required to allow sufficient time to fulfil their Board responsibilities and to provide constructive
challenges, strategic guidance, specialist advice and to hold management to account. Non-Executive Directors are appointed
for specific terms, up to a maximum of three years. All Directors offer annual re-election by shareholders. The Board sets out
to shareholders, in papers accompanying a resolution, the reasons why they consider an individual suitable for election and the
Chairman confirms to shareholders when proposing re-elections that the Director’s performance remains effective. The Chairman
periodically holds meetings with the Non-Executive Directors without the Executive Director present to provide a forum in which
the performance and actions of the Senior Leadership Team and the wider business can be discussed freely.
Paula Dowdy is the appointed Senior Independent Non-Executive Director (“SID”). The SID provides a sounding board for the
Chairman and serves as an intermediary for the other Directors when necessary. The SID is available to shareholders if they
have concerns that cannot be resolved through the normal channels of the Chairman or the Executive Director, or where such
contact is inappropriate. Led by the SID, the Non-Executive Directors meet without the Chairman, at least annually, to appraise
the Chairman’s performance and on such other occasions as deemed appropriate.
Graphics
Board Governance
34
The CEO is responsible for managing the business, and she leads the Senior Leadership Team, which meets on a weekly basis
to discuss operational matters, business performance, employee matters, and key developments. The Chief Financial Officer
oversees the Group’s financial affairs, including any tax and treasury matters and investor relations activities.
All directors have access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary, who provides advice on governance and listing
requirements and ensures that Board and Committee procedures are complied with. The directors also have access to independent
professional advice at the Company’s expense where necessary to discharge their responsibility as directors.
Independence of the Non-Executive Directors
In accordance with the 2024 Code, a majority of the Board is comprised of Non-Executive Directors (including the Chairman),
of which two are considered to be independent, allowing them to constructively challenge management and be free from any
business or other relationship which could materially interfere with the exercise of their independent judgement.
The letter of appointment of each Non-Executive Director sets out the expected time commitment for them to perform their role
and notes the possibility that additional time may need to be spent at certain times. The other significant commitments of our
directors are disclosed in the directors’ biographies. The effectiveness of the Board and individual directors is assessed through
the annual review of Board effectiveness as described on page 38.
Tenure
Non-Executive Directors are typically appointed for an initial term of approximately three years and subsequent terms of
approximately three years where appropriate. Appointments are subject to annual re-election by shareholders. Details of the
Non-Executive Directors’ terms of appointment are shown in the table below, and copies of the Non-Executive Directors’ terms of
appointment are available to view at the Company’s registered office. The Executive Director also has in place a service contract
without an expiry date, but with a notice period of six months.
Initial
agreement date
Date of
appointment
End of current term of
appointment
Ivan Martin
1
21 October 2015 1 January 2016 27 May 2026
2
Paula Dowdy 14 May 2025 28 May 2025 28 May 2028
Sara Dickinson 30 September 2021 1 October 2021 1 October 2027
1 As announced on 1 October 2024, Ivan Martin will step down from the Board following the 2026 AGM.
2 Subject to the completion of the Strategic Review. See the Chairman's Statement.
Information and support to the Board
The Board and its Committees are provided with comprehensive papers in a timely manner, enabling members to be fully briefed
on matters to be discussed at Board meetings and at other appropriate times. The CEO and CFO keep the Board informed of
business matters relating to the Group on a timely basis, providing various updates on a range of aspects, including trading
performance, client relationships and change management programmes.
The Company Secretary and external advisors periodically update the Board on regulatory changes. Following each Board meeting,
the Company Secretary implements a thorough follow-up process to ensure actions agreed upon by the Board and its Committees
are completed.
Each director is covered by appropriate Directors’ and Officers’ Liability Insurance. The Directors also have the benefit of the
indemnity provision contained in Article 138 of the Company’s Articles of Association. Pursuant to this Article 138, the Company
has granted indemnities for the benefit of current and future directors and the Company Secretary of the Company in respect of
liabilities which may attach to them in their capacity as Directors of, or Company Secretary of, the Company to the extent permitted
by law and also committed to maintain Directors’ and Officers’ Insurance cover. Qualifying third party indemnity provisions (as
defined by section 234 of the Companies Act 2006) were in force during the year ended 31 December 2025 and continue in force,
in relation to certain losses and liabilities which the directors (or Company Secretary) may incur to third parties in the course of
acting as directors (or as Company Secretary).
Graphics
35
Board and Committee Attendance
The number of meetings held by the Board and its Committees together with individual attendances by Directors and Committee
members is set out in the table below.
Board
1
Nomination
Committee
Audit
Committee
Remuneration
Committee
1
Number of Meetings held in 2025 9 1 3 7
Alex Curran 9/9 N/A N/A N/A
Sara Dickinson 8/9 1/1 3/3 7/7
Mike Johns
2
2/2 N/A N/A N/A
Ivan Martin 9/9 1/1 N/A 7/7
Barbara Moorhouse
3
3/3 1/1 1/1 3/3
Paula Dowdy 6/6 0/0 2/2 4/4
1 During the year, a number of additional Board meetings and Committee meetings were also held for the purpose of discussing ad-hoc or time sensitive matters. These meetings are
not included in the above figures.
2 Mike Johns stepped down from the Board on 25 March 2025.
3 Barbara Moorhouse stepped down from the Board on 28 May 2025.
Executive Directors attended some committee meetings, and the Chair attended the Audit Committee, by invitation. These
attendances are not shown in the above table.
Board Induction and Development Programme
Training and development are an important element in establishing the ongoing effectiveness of the Board and ensuring that the
Board has an appropriate combination of skills and knowledge.
Board Governance
Any new appointments to the Board are supported by a comprehensive induction and handover process. However, whilst there is
a full induction programme in place, this is tailored to suit the incoming directors’ expertise and any prospective Committee roles.
Our aim is to familiarise a new director with the business model, the operations of the Group, the key challenges and opportunities
along with the statutory duties of the director, and the governance framework within which the Group operates.
For existing directors, the Chair ensures that they receive ongoing training and development opportunities as required or requested.
Conflicts of Interest
Directors are required to declare any actual or potential conflicts of interest within the Board decision-making process and, should
any such conflicts arise, absent themselves from discussions relating to that item of business. None of our Directors or their
connected persons, has any family relationship with any other Director or Officer, nor has a material interest in any contract to
which the Company or any of its subsidiaries are, or were, a party during the year or up to 7 April 2026.
When assessing additional directorships, the Board considers the number of public directorships already held by the director and
their expected time commitment for those roles (see biographies on pages 29 to 30). The Board also considers guidance published
by institutional investors and proxy advisers regarding the maximum number of public appointments which can be managed
both effectively and efficiently. Executive Directors may accept a non-executive role at another company with the approval of the
Board. The Board is satisfied that each of the Non-Executive Directors can devote sufficient time to the Company’s business to
discharge their responsibilities effectively.
Diversity Policy
Although the Board has not adopted a specific diversity policy, the Board and the Committee recognises the importance of
promoting all aspects of diversity throughout the Group (please see page 14 for the Group’s diversity, equity and inclusion policy).
When considering any new appointments to the Board and Senior Leadership Team, candidates will continue to be chosen against
criteria, including their balance of skills, business experience, independence, qualifications, knowledge, diversity and other factors
relevant to the Board operating effectively. Successful candidates are chosen on merit against these criteria, regardless of race,
gender, social background or religious beliefs, but every effort is made to ensure that a diverse pool of potential candidates is
reached via the recruitment process.
Graphics
Board Governance
36
The following table details the Board and executive management diversity, prepared in accordance with UK Listing Rule 6.6.6R(10):
Gender Identity or Sex
No. of Board
Members %age of the Board
No. of Senior
Positions on the
Board (CEO, CFO,
SID and Chair)
No. in Executive
Management
%age of Executive
Management
Men 1 25 1 1 33%
Women 3 75 2 2 67%
Not Specified/prefer not to say
Ethnic Background
No. of Board
Members %age of the Board
No. of Senior
Positions on the
Board (CEO, CFO,
SID and Chair)
No. in Executive
Management
%age of Executive
Management
White British or other White (including
minority-white groups)
4 100 3 3 100
Mixed/Multiple Ethnic Groups
Asian/Asian British
Black/African/Caribbean/Black British
Other Ethnic Group
Not Specified/prefer not to say
Explanation against UKLR 6.6.6(9)
The table above provides our Board and executive management diversity data as at 31 December 2025, our chosen reference date,
which has been prepared in accordance with UK Listing Rule 6.6.6(9). The Company met the targets set out in UKLR 6.6.6(9) a(i)
and UKLR 6.6.6(9) a(ii). Two of the three senior positions on the Board (Chair, CFO, CEO and SID) are held by women (CEO and SID)
and 75% of the Board of Directors are women. The Board recognises that it has not met the target to have at least one member
on the Board who is from a minority ethnic background and that there is always more we can do. The Board recognises that
diversity in its broadest sense, approach and experience are important considerations as part of the selection criteria used to
assess candidates to achieve a balanced Board.
Following the forthcoming departure of Ivan Martin at this year’s AGM, and subject to the completion of the Strategic Review,
female representation on the Board is expected to increase to 100% on an interim basis, pending the appointment of a new non-
executive director.
Source of Data
Data concerning gender and ethnicity representation on the Board and Senior Leadership Team, as set out in the table on page 41
was collected directly from all the individual Board and Senior Leadership Team. Each individual disclosed their gender and
ethnicity using the options included on a form, which align with the detail in the left-hand column of the aforementioned table
and therefore includes the option to not specify an answer.
Graphics
Nomination Committee Report
37
Committee Membership Member Since Scheduled Meetings Attended
Ivan Martin (Chair) 1 January 2016, becoming Chair on 4 March 2016 1/1
Barbara Moorhouse
1
1 April 2017 1/1
Paula Dowdy 28 May 2025 0/0
Sara Dickinson 1 October 2021 1/1
1 Barbara Moorhouse stepped down from the Board on 28 May 2025
Ivan Martin, Chairman of the Company, is Chair of the Nomination Committee (the “Committee”) which meets at least once a
year. Only the members of the Committee have the right to attend meetings. Other individuals, such as the Chief Executive Officer,
SVP People & Culture, and external advisers may be invited to attend meetings, as appropriate.
Main Responsibilities of the Committee
The Committee reports to the Board on how it has discharged its responsibilities. Its main responsibilities are to:
review the structure, size and composition of the Board, its Committees and the Senior Leadership Team, including its balance
of skills and experience and diversity, and make recommendations to the Board with regard to any changes;
identify and nominate candidates, for the Board’s approval, to fill Board vacancies as and when required;
receive and consider notifications from directors of situations, such as proposed external appointments, in which a potential
conflict of interest might arise and/or their time commitment to the Board could be compromised;
consider succession planning for Directors and Senior Leadership Team members, taking into account the challenges and
opportunities facing the Group, and therefore the skills and expertise that are needed now and in the future;
assess the time commitment required from Non-Executive Directors; and
oversee the annual Board effectiveness review process and review the Committee’s own performance.
The Committee’s terms of reference, which are reviewed annually, can be found on the Company’s website
www.aptitudesoftware.com.
Dear Shareholder
I’m pleased to present this report, which provides an overview of the areas of focus for the Committee during the year and those
for the year ahead.
This year, the Committee met once, with all members present. In addition, a separate session was held to review the effectiveness
of the Board, which was overseen by the Nomination Committee.
Graphics
Nomination Committee Report
38
Areas of focus
Set out below are some of the key matters addressed by the Committee during 2025:
approved the appointment of Paula Dowdy as the Senior Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Remuneration Committee;
undertook a full review of succession plans for the Executive Directors and Senior Leadership Team, and agreed steps to
further strengthen the plans; and
agreed with the framework and scope of the internal Board effectiveness review. The findings from this review are described
below.
The Committee’s key focus in 2026 will be to refresh its composition, with the appointment of at least one new non-executive
director to the Board. One of the existing directors or the new non-executive director will then transition to become Chair of the
Board in preparation for my stepping down from the Board at the 2026 AGM. The Committee will continue its search to appoint
a permanent CFO to the Board. The findings from the 2025 performance evaluation will also be considered by the Committee in
the Board for succession planning process.
Annual Review of Performance and Effectiveness
The annual review of Board and its Committees effectiveness for the year ended 31 December 2025 took place on 27 February
2026. The Committee determined that it was appropriate for an internally facilitated review to be undertaken and approved the
structure of the review. The Chairman led the evaluation with the SID leading the evaluation of the Chairman.
The review took the form of a dedicated session held outside of a scheduled Board meeting, with all Directors and the Interim
Company Secretary in attendance. At this session, Directors were asked to consider:
the actions taken in response to the findings from the previous year’s Board effectiveness review;
the strategic decisions taken by the Board and its Committees over the past 12 months, and how effective the Board and its
Committees had been in reaching these decisions;
shareholder engagement;
the quality and timing of information provided to the Board and its Committees the collective effectiveness of the Board and
its Committees; and
the individual effectiveness of each Board member. Each Board member was required to leave the room while their own
effectiveness was being discussed.
The results of the evaluation were presented to the Committee at its meeting held in March 2026 and actions required to address
areas for improvement were agreed. This included the individual feedback on the Directors performance.
Overall, the review concluded that the Board, its Committees and each Director continued to operate effectively and that this
Committee is operating effectively and fulfilling the duties delegated to it by the Board.
The Board therefore supports the re-election of our directors, in accordance with the 2024 Corporate Governance Code, at the
Annual General Meeting on 27 May 2026.
Ivan Martin
Chair, Nominations Committee
7 April 2026
Graphics
Audit Committee Report
39
Committee Membership Member Since Scheduled Meetings Attended
Sara Dickinson (Chair) 1 October 2021, becoming Chair on 1 April
2022
3/3
Barbara Moorhouse
1
1 April 2017 (Served as Chair until 1 April 2022) 1/1
Paula Dowdy 28 May 2025 2/2
1 Barbara Moorhouse stepped down from the Board on 28 May 2025
Sara Dickinson, Chair (the “Chair”) of the Audit Committee (the “Committee”), has recent and relevant financial experience through
her current role as Chief Financial Officer of a significant global business. The other member of the Committee is Paula Dowdy.
The Committee as a whole has competence relevant to the business, and the qualifications and experience of both Committee
members can be found within their biographies on pages 29 to 30. In accordance with the recommendations of the 2024 Code,
Ivan Martin, Chairman of the Board, is not a member of the Audit Committee, but he does attend meetings as an observer. Other
regular attendees are the CEO and representatives from RSM, as external auditors. The Committee also met with RSM, without
management being present, and the Chair engaged regularly with the lead audit partner.
Main Responsibilities of the Committee
The Audit Committee reports to the Board on how it has discharged its responsibilities. It meets at least three times a year, and
its main responsibilities are to:
ensure the integrity of the Company’s financial reporting to shareholders and any announcements relating to the Group’s
financial performance;
ensure financial statements comply with UK statutory and regulatory requirements;
review the content of the Annual Report and advise the Board on whether, taken as a whole, it is fair, balanced and
understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s performance, business
model and strategy;
monitor the effectiveness of internal controls and risk management in compliance with the 2024 Code;
agree internal audit plans and consider their outcomes;
on behalf of the Board, carry out a robust assessment of the principal and emerging risks facing the Group;
ensure the effectiveness of the external audit function, agree the scope of the audits, the auditors’ fees and the terms of their
engagement; and
oversee climate-change reporting.
The Committee’s terms of reference, which are reviewed annually, can be found on the Company’s website
www.aptitudesoftware.com.
Graphics
Audit Committee Report
40
Dear Shareholder
I am pleased to present this report, which provides an overview of the areas of focus for the Committee during the year, as well
as its key activities and the framework within which it operates.
Areas of focus
Set out below are some of the key matters addressed by the Committee during 2025:
reviewed the 2024 Annual Report, determined that it was fair, balanced and understandable, and recommended it for
approval by the Board;
monitored the integrity of the financial statements of the Group and financial announcements released during 2025;
carried out an assessment of the principal and climate-related risks to determine that they remained appropriate;
considered need for an internal audit function and concluded that none were necessary in the year under review;
oversaw work to ensure that the Group will be able to comply with Provision 29 of the 2024 Code;
reviewed the calculations to determine the Company’s overall carbon footprint and considered appropriate decarbonisation
steps to be taken. Further information on this work is contained in the Responsible Business Report on pages 14 to 16; and
assessed the performance and independence of RSM as external auditors and recommended to the Board that the
reappointment of RSM be put to a shareholders’ vote at the 2026 AGM.
In addition to the Committee’s responsibilities as set out in its terms of reference, the Committee’s focus for 2026 will be:
monitoring and reviewing the effectiveness of material controls;
raising focus on fraud risks and awareness;
conducting a periodic review of our approach to assessing our principal risks;
supporting new employees in key roles within the Finance function; and
considering the findings from internal audits which may be undertaken.
Internal Control
The Group maintains an ongoing process in respect of monitoring internal controls to safeguard shareholders’ investments and
the Group’s assets and to facilitate the effective and efficient operation of the Group.
These processes enable the Group to respond appropriately (in accordance with the 2024 Code), and in a timely fashion, to
significant business, operational, financial, compliance and other risks, which may otherwise prevent the achievement of the
Group’s objectives.
The Group recognises that it operates in a competitive market which can be affected by factors and events outside its control.
Details of the principal risks identified by the Group are set out in the table on pages 24 to 26. The Group is committed to
mitigating risks wherever possible and reviews actual and potential risks on an ongoing basis. The Board considers that a system
of internal controls, rigorously applied and monitored, is an essential tool in mitigating risks.
The key elements of the Group’s internal control framework, which have been effective during 2025 and up to the date of approval
of these financial statements, are:
the existence of a clear organisational structure with defined lines of responsibility and delegation of authority from the
Board to its Executive Director and the operating business;
a procedure for the regular review of business issues and risks by the Executive Director and Senior Leadership Team;
a planning and management reporting system operated by the operating business and overseen by the Executive Director
and the Senior Leadership Team; and
the establishment and maintenance of prudent operating and financial policies.
Graphics
41
The Directors have overall responsibility for establishing financial and other reporting procedures to provide them with a
reasonable basis on which to make accurate and timely judgements regarding the financial position and prospects of the Group
and have responsibility for establishing the Group’s systems of internal control and for monitoring their effectiveness.
The Group’s systems are designed to provide Directors with reasonable assurance that physical and financial assets are safeguarded,
liabilities are recorded accurately and completely, transactions are authorised and properly recorded, and material errors and
irregularities are either prevented or detected with minimum delay. However, systems of internal financial control can provide
only reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss.
The key features of the systems of internal financial control include:
the financial planning process, with an annual financial plan approved by the Board. Business performance and expected
outturn is regularly monitored and updated, which provides the basis for regular updates to the Group’s rolling forecast;
the monthly comparison of actual results against plan and prior periods;
written procedures detailing operational and financial internal control policies. These policies are reviewed and updated
where appropriate, on a regular basis;
regular reporting to the Committee and Board on tax, treasury and legal matters;
defined investment control guidelines and procedures; and
periodic reviews by the Committee of the Group’s systems and procedures.
Most of the Group’s financial and management information is processed and stored on computer systems. The Group is dependent
on systems that require sophisticated computer networks. The Group has established controls and procedures over the security of
data held on such systems, including business continuity arrangements.
Controls in respect of financial reporting and the production of consolidated financial statements are well established. Group
accounting policies are consistently applied and reviewed, and reconciliation controls operate effectively. Standard reporting
packages are used by all Group entities to ensure consistent and accurate information is available for the production of the
consolidated financial statements. The Committee has also carried out a review of enhancements to our framework of internal
controls to ensure compliance with the incoming Provision 29 of the 2024 Code.
On behalf of the Board, the Audit Committee has also reviewed the key risks facing the Group, and the operation and effectiveness
of its framework of internal control for the year ended 31 December 2025 and up to the date of approval of this Annual Report.
Significant Judgements
The significant judgements considered by the Audit Committee in its review of the 2025 financial statements are set out below.
Revenue Recognition
Embedded within the Group’s policy on revenue recognition are a number of areas in which management assumptions and
estimates are necessary.
These principally comprise:
the assessment on inception of each contract of whether ongoing contractual obligations, charged as software maintenance,
represent a separately distinct performance obligation and promise from the licence;
the determination of whether these revenues should be recognised over time and the period across which revenue recognition
should take place;
the assessment of development activity, determined as being the most reasonable measure of recognising software revenue,
being consistent across the period;
the evaluation by management on a contract-by-contract basis of where revenue should be limited to the amount of any
amount invoiced and paid. This is relevant where the product has not yet been deployed into a live client environment and
sufficient challenges exist that would cast doubt over future economic benefits being realised by the Group;
whether the entry into annual renewal periods represents a new contract; and
the evaluation of whether implementation services represent a distinct performance obligation and promise from the licence.
Graphics
Audit Committee Report
42
In undertaking their review, the Audit Committee receives both an overview of significant contracts entered into during the course
of the year, along with a sample of other contracts entered into prior to 2025 which provides the opportunity to discuss the impact
and application of each of these assumptions and estimates on the contracts selected. The Audit Committee carefully considered
and discussed with the external auditors the revenue recognition on these contracts and concluded that they are satisfied with
the accounting treatment adopted in preparing the 2025 financial statements.
As part of the Audit Committee’s normal activities, the Committee was provided with an overview of significant balances, including
deferred income, together with the movement on those balances since the previous year's end.
The Committee concluded that the recognition of revenue continues to be in line with the Group’s accounting policy on revenue
recognition.
Annual Goodwill Impairment Review
Goodwill is a material asset on the Group’s balance sheet, and it is the Group’s policy to test the asset annually for impairment. The
judgements in relation to goodwill impairment testing relate to the assumptions applied in calculating the value in use of the assets
in the Aptitude business. The key assumptions applied in the calculation relate to the future performance expectations of the
business. The Audit Committee received a presentation on the outcome of the impairment review, including future performance
expectations, performed by senior management. The Audit Committee concluded that the asset was not materially misstated and
there was no requirement to write down the carrying value of goodwill as at 31 December 2025.
Development Costs
As the Group continues to develop its product suite, it incurs a significant level of associated costs which totalled £13.2 million
in 2025. A key area of judgment in respect of development costs is whether any of these meet the criteria set out in IAS 38 for
capitalisation.
The Audit Committee received a presentation from management outlining the review performed on all development costs
incurred during the year under review, against the relevant criteria, and concluded that no capitalisation was required.
Tax
The Group operates in a number of countries which increases the complexity of the Group’s tax affairs. Senior management
provides regular updates of the Group’s tax status to the Board and Audit Committee for consideration. The Group continues to
assess the risk that some elements of its supplies in certain USA states would have been subject to sales tax in previous periods as
a result of recent changes in the interpretation and application of sales tax regulations in the USA. The business continues to work
with its external advisors to ensure it applies sales tax to any new contracts in the USA where required. In all other aspects, the
Audit Committee is currently satisfied with the tax position of the Group.
Accounting Standards
There have not been any new accounting standards effective during the year which had any significant impact on the Group’s
accounting policies and disclosures in these financial statements. The Audit Committee continues to monitor the application of
relevant accounting standards to the Group, including standards which are not yet effective, engaging with the external auditors
on this subject as appropriate. Most of the new standards, amendments and interpretations, which are effective for periods
beginning after 1 January 2026 and which have not been adopted early, are not expected to have a significant effect on the
consolidated financial statements of the Group. The effect of IFRS 18, which has an effective date of 1 January 2027 will be
considered by the Committee in 2026.
Internal Audit
The Audit Committee, with engagement from the wider Board and senior management, determines those areas of focus which
require specific internal audit review. Specialist external organisations, which have appropriate independence and wider industry
knowledge, are engaged where necessary to perform internal audit reviews. The results of all internal audit work undertaken are
presented to the Audit Committee.
The Committee has been satisfied with the processes for identifying areas for assurance review and addressing findings arising
from internal audits. With the Board’s support, the Committee maintains that a separate internal audit function would be less
efficient than current arrangements.
Graphics
43
External Auditor
RSM were appointed external auditor and Graham Ricketts was appointed external audit partner on 17 September 2021. External
audit partners are rotated every five years in accordance with Auditing Practices Board standards (seven years for subsidiary
companies). The Committee intends to comply fully with the FRC Guidance on External Auditors and carry out an audit tender
at least every ten years and mandatory rotation at least every 20 years. The Audit Committee meets at least annually with the
Group’s external auditor without the other Directors present. The external auditor has unrestricted access to the Audit Committee.
To fulfil its responsibility regarding the effectiveness of the external Auditor and oversight of the audit process, principal procedures
carried out by the Committee include:
review of the relevant skills and experience of the audit partner and team;
review of the Auditor’s planning report detailing scope of the audit, materiality and identification of areas of audit risk;
consideration of formal reports from the Auditor about the audit process, including issues which arose during the audit, and
their resolution, plus key accounting issues and judgements; and
consideration of recommendations made by the Auditor in their management letters and the adequacy of management’s
response.
Based upon its reviews, the Committee has recommended the reappointment of RSM as an external auditor to the Board.
Non-audit services
The Audit Committee and the Board keep the external auditor’s independence under close scrutiny. The Group also receives a
formal statement of independence and objectivity from external auditors each year. A policy is in place that governs the provision
of non-audit services provided by RSM, setting out those services that are permissible, and the process to be followed to obtain
approval for such services. All such services must be approved. The policy is regularly reviewed by the Committee. The Committee
monitors compliance with the policy and the monetary cap on non-audit fees. The external auditor did not provide any non-audit
services in 2025, or during the prior year.
Anti Bribery & Corruption
Aptitude is committed to ensuring adherence to the highest legal and ethical standards and is committed to upholding all laws
relevant to countering bribery and corruption in all the jurisdictions in which we operate.
Managers are also responsible for the effective operation of the policy and actively monitor the procedures and processes put in
place by Aptitude.
All employees must:
observe their contractual duty to disclose to Aptitude any ‘out of work interests‘; and
assist Aptitude in identifying and preventing corrupt activities, be vigilant and report any suspicious activity or any instances
of bribery or attempted bribery (whether affecting themselves, another employee or an external contractor or consultant)
immediately to the SVP, People & Culture.
Acts of bribery and corruption, or failure by any of Aptitude’s employees to report suspected acts of bribery or corruption, are
disciplinary offences and will be dealt with under Aptitude’s disciplinary procedure. Serious offences may be regarded as gross
misconduct which could result in immediate dismissal.
Graphics
Audit Committee Report
44
Whistleblowing policy
The whistleblowing policy enables workers (including employees and other individuals performing functions for Aptitude, such as
agency workers and contractors) to voice any concerns in a responsible and effective manner. The policy states that if a worker
discovers information which they believe shows serious malpractice or wrongdoing within the organisation then this information
should be disclosed internally without fear of reprisal. A dedicated email address is provided for any whistleblowing concerns
to be raised, which will be sent to an independent non-executive Board member. All matters will be treated with the strictest
confidence, and the worker’s identity will not be disclosed without their prior consent. The worker’s concerns will be considered
and further investigation is undertaken as necessary. If during the investigation it is deemed necessary for the identity of the
worker to be disclosed, their consent will be sought. The matter will then be reported to the Board in order that appropriate action
can be taken. On conclusion of any investigation, as far as appropriate, the worker may be informed of the outcome and what
action, if any, the Board has taken or proposes to take.
Audit Committee evaluation
During the year, as part of the review of Board effectiveness overseen by the Nomination Committee, the Committee carried out
an evaluation of its effectiveness and concluded that it continued to carry out its role effectively.
Communication from the Financial Reporting Council
During the year, the Chairman of the Board received a letter from the Financial Reporting Council (FRC) stating that the 2024
Annual Report and Accounts had been the subject of a limited scope review by its Corporate Reporting Review team, as part
of its thematic review of smaller listed company reporting. We were pleased to learn that, following its review, the FRC had no
questions or queries to raise with the Company.
The FRC did make some observations that it believed could enhance existing disclosures, and these have been considered by the
Committee and management as part of the preparation of the 2025 Annual Report and Accounts. We note that the FRC:
review was based solely on the 2024 Annual Report and Accounts and did not benefit from detailed knowledge of our
business, or an understanding of the group’s underlying transaction; and
the letter provides no assurance that the 2024 Annual Report and Accounts were correct in all material respects, and the FRC
accepts no liability for reliance on the letter by the Company or any third party.
Sara Dickinson
Chair, Audit Committee
Fair, balanced and understandable
In line with the Committee’s responsibility for ensuring there are robust financial reporting procedures and internal controls
in place, and the UK Corporate Governance Code requirement for the Committee to advise the Board in relation to the annual
report and accounts, in particular whether, taken as a whole, it is fair, balanced and understandable, the Committee undertook
an assessment of the Group’s Annual Report and Financial Statements 2025. After completion of the review, the Committee
was satisfied that:
taken as a whole, the Group’s Annual Report and Financial Statements 2025, are fair, balanced and understandable;
the report accurately reflected the information shareholders would require in order to assess the Group’s position and
performance, business model and strategy; and
the use of alternative performance measures contained in the report assists in presenting a fair review of the Group’s
business.
Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
45
Committee Membership
1
Member Since Scheduled Meetings Attended
Paula Dowdy (Chair) 28 May 2025, becoming Chair on 28 May 2025 4/4
Barbara Moorhouse
1
1 April 2017 (Served as Chair until 28 May
2025)
3/3
Ivan Martin 1 January 2016 7/7
Sara Dickinson 1 October 2021 7/7
1 Barabara Moorhouse stepped down from the Board and Chair of the Remuneration Committee on 28 May 2025
Only Committee members have the right to attend Committee meetings, though other individuals such as the Executive Director,
senior management (except when their own remuneration is being discussed) and external advisors may be invited to attend
meetings as and when appropriate.
Dear Shareholder
On behalf of the Remuneration Committee of the Company, I am pleased to present our 2025 Remuneration Report. This report
provides insight into the decisions the Remuneration Committee (“Committee”) has taken in determining the remuneration
outcomes for the Executive Directors, our Senior Leadership Team and the wider workforce. It also provides an updated summary
of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy (“Policy”) that will be voted on by shareholders at our 2026 AGM and how the Committee
proposes to implement that Policy in 2026. The Committee’s primary function is to ensure that the delivery of the Company’s
Strategy is supported by the Policy and that remuneration decisions are taken in accordance with the Policy to reflect the needs of
the Company and its stakeholders. The Committee’s full terms of reference provide further details of the roles and responsibilities
of the Committee and are available on the Company’s website aptitudesoftware.com. During the year, the Committee held seven
scheduled meetings, plus a number of additional ad hoc meetings for the purpose of discussing and approving specific matters. The
work of the Committee has included the monitoring of performance versus targets set for the Management Bonus Scheme and
for awards made under the Performance Share Plan to determine outcomes; setting the personal and financial objectives for the
2025 Annual Bonus Plan; reviewing the workforce remuneration arrangements; approving the 2025 salary increases implemented
across the business; and approving remuneration arrangements for members of the Senior Leadership Team.
In 2025, the Committee continued to support the implementation of the Company’s strategy and supported the more deeply
embedded company-wide objective setting framework. This was to support the focus on driving a high-performing, accountable
and strategically aligned organisation under Alex Curran’s leadership. Remuneration structures were reviewed to ensure they
differentiate performance appropriately and support the attraction and retention of key talent during this year of transformation.
There has been a strong focus on data-driven assessment of performance, engagement and organisational health, informing
balanced and evidence-based decisions.
The Committee also maintained oversight of the costs associated with organisational restructuring and ensured that related
processes were fair and balanced across different legal jurisdictions globally while supporting the delivery of required efficiencies.
Finally, the Committee has reviewed whether the existing remuneration arrangements, as set out in our current Policy, continue
to support the Company’s strategy and are consistent with shareholder expectations. Small adjustments were made to simplify
the policy.
Paula Dowdy
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
46
Performance for the year under review
2025 was a year of continuing evolution of Aptitude’s strategic focus toward AI Autonomous Finance. In 2025, Aptitude continued
its pivot toward becoming a SaaS company. This realignment was, underpinned by the Group’s strategic priorities of driving growth
through Fynapse, increasing customer satisfaction to minimise churn and expanding our partner relationships. This approach has
been supported by the Policy and the Senior Leadership Team (SLT)’s approach to staff performance management to ensure that
we continue to attract, retain and promote the right talent.
The Committee maintains its focus on ensuring that key employees are appropriately incentivised, currently and over the longer
term. Engagement on remuneration and benefits takes place in various forms with the SLT and the workforce.
All permanent employees of the Group participate in one of the variable remuneration schemes in operation, namely the
Management Bonus Scheme, Sales Commission Plan, the Consultant’s Bonus Scheme, the Variable Compensation Scheme, and
the Performance Excellence Bonus. These schemes are reviewed annually to ensure proper alignment with the Group’s objectives.
Awards of Performance Share Plan (PSP) were granted to the Executive Director and SLT members; and Restricted Stock Units
(“RSUs”) were made in 2025 to key individuals outside of the SLT. These awards provide a clearer means of providing longer-term
incentives to employees, aligning rewards with overall corporate performance - further information is provided on pages 46 to
47. The Committee will also continue to grant long term incentives to PSP and RSU awards, to recruit, retain and incentivise key
individuals and align the generation of shareholder value with reward. See page 59 for grants made during the year.
No discretion, outside the scope of the existing Policy, was applied by the Committee during the year ended 31 December 2025.
Remuneration Outcomes for 2025
Management Bonus Scheme
The Executive Director was eligible to earn a bonus for 2025 of up to 125% of salary, subject to performance against specific
financial and non-financial metrics. This resulted in an overall bonus amount of £71,748 for Alex Curran of which 20% will be paid
in the form of shares deferred for a period of two years, ensuring longer-term alignment with the interests of shareholders.
Performance Share Plan (“PSP”) awards granted in 2022
The PSP awards granted on 22 November 2022 were subject to i) 75% relative TSR performance for the three-year period which
ended on 22 November 2025; and ii) 25% EPS growth for the three years ended 31 December 2024. The Remuneration Committee
has confirmed that these awards attained nil vesting, because the Company’s EPS growth was below threshold and TSR in the
performance period was below the median of the constituents of the FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts).
Performance Share Plan (“PSP”) awards granted in 2023
The PSP awards granted on 6 September 2023 were subject to i) 75% relative TSR performance for the three-year period which
ends on 6 September 2026; and ii) 25% EPS growth for the three years ended 31 December 2025. The Remuneration Committee
has confirmed that the EPS growth was below the threshold and therefore this element of the award vested at 0%.
Our Directors’ Remuneration Policy
Our current Directors’ Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the Company’s 2023 Annual General Meeting, with
over 96% of votes in favour. The next shareholder vote on the Policy will take place at the 2026 AGM.
The Committee has reviewed the existing Policy and has concluded that it remains broadly fit for purpose. The proposed updates
will ensure that there is sufficient flexibility in the Policy for the next three years to enable us to attract, retain and incentivise
high calibre individuals and maximise the Group’s growth potential. The full text of the proposed revised Policy can be found on
pages 48 to 56 of this report.
Approach to Executive Director remuneration in 2026
The Group’s approach to Executive remuneration in 2026 will be in line with the Policy and in accordance with the recommendations
of the 2024 Code, as follows:
Base Salary
As disclosed last year and in line with policy across the Group, the Committee reviews the level of base salaries for Executive
Directors annually. The review takes account of business context, personal performance and relative salary data both internal and
external to the Group. Taking account of business performance, the restructuring of the Company being largely completed and
expected progress against strategy, Alex Curran’s base salary will be increased from US$412,000 to US$485,000, reflecting the
reinstatement of the voluntary pay reduction taken in 2024 (US$50,000) and a subsequent 5% increase.
Graphics
47
When making decisions on pay for Executive Directors and senior management, the Committee considers wider workforce
remuneration and conditions to ensure that these are aligned on an ongoing basis. The Group has internal processes in place to
ensure that pay levels across the Group are also fair in relation to the role type and the gender of employees. Further details on
the Group’s approach to diversity, equity and inclusion can be found on page 14.
For all our employees, including Executive Directors, the Committee benchmarks base salary levels for competitiveness. If
misalignment occurs, the Committee may review and adjust these salaries, subject to both corporate and individual performance.
The average increase in salaries across the Group during 2025 was 2.7%.
Benefits
The Committee recognises that Alex's role and circumstances differ from those of the wider workforce. In light of the regular
transatlantic travel she undertakes in her personal time, together with her material contribution to the business, the Committee
has determined that an annual disturbance allowance of US$50,000 will continue to be payable in equal monthly instalments.
The disturbance allowance will not form part of a pensionable salary and will be excluded from the calculation of any annual bonus
or Performance Share Plan (PSP) awards.
Retirement benefits
Pension contributions for UK-based Executive Directors will remain at 6% of salary in accordance with the Policy, being at a level
which is consistent with pension contributions provided to the wider workforce. The CEO’s pension contribution will be capped at
4% in accordance with plan rules and regulations (aligned with the US-based workforce).
Management Bonus Scheme
For 2026 the maximum bonus opportunity for Executive Directors will be increased to 150% of salary, which is in line with our
Remuneration Policy. The level of bonuses earned will be subject to the achievement of appropriate performance measures. 75%
of the opportunity will be based on financial performance measures (expected to be based on Operating Profit, Annual Recurring
Revenue and Revenue with an equal weighting) and 25% on non-financial measures linked to the delivery of the Group’s key
strategic goals. The payment of any bonus in respect of non-financial measures will be conditional on the achievement of a
financial underpin. 20% of any bonus payment earned will be subject to a deferral period of two years and payable in shares.
PSP awards
For awards granted in 2026, the maximum PSP opportunity will be 125% of salary. Awards will be granted after the release of the
half yearly results and the Committee will have regard to share price performance and other relevant factors when confirming
the grants.
The performance measures will include a relative TSR measure for at least 75% of the award and at least one other financial
metric, such as EPS. The TSR measure will compare the Group’s TSR performance against a comparator group consisting of the
FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts) over a three-year period from the date of grant, with 25% vesting for median
performance rising to 100% for upper-quartile performance. The weighting of the performance measures and the performance
targets for the other financial metric will be disclosed both at grant and in the 2026 Directors’ Remuneration Report.
Looking ahead key focus areas for the Committee for 2026
During 2026, the Committee will continue to monitor and review our remuneration approach for the Board, members of the
Senior Leadership Team, and the wider workforce, to ensure that it best supports the areas of strategic focus of the business. The
Committee will also continue to review best market practice to ensure that Aptitude attracts and retains high calibre individuals
across its countries of operation in challenging global economic conditions, whilst being focused on delivering shareholder value
and remaining compliant with the Policy.
Reporting and policy requirements
This Report comprises:
Part A, being a summary of the draft Policy, will be tabled for shareholder approval at the 2026 AGM. All payments made to
Directors of the Company will be in accordance with this Policy. The existing Policy was approved by shareholders at the 2023
Annual General Meeting.
Part B, being the annual report on remuneration (the Implementation Report), which will be subject to an advisory vote at the
2026 AGM. The Implementation Report provides details of the remuneration paid to Directors in respect of the year ended 31
December 2025.
Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
48
Compliance
This Report (comprising this introduction and Parts A and B) has been prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and
The Large and Medium Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013, The Companies
(Directors’ Remuneration Policy and Directors’ Remuneration Report) Regulations 2019 and The Companies (Miscellaneous
Reporting) Regulations 2018. The Report also meets the relevant requirements of the Financial Conduct Authority Listing Rules.
As the Group employs fewer than 250 employees in the United Kingdom it is not required to disclose a CEO pay ratio calculation.
Given that most of the workforce is outside of the UK, the Group considers that the voluntary publication of such a calculation
would not provide a meaningful disclosure.
A. DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY (“POLICY”)
This part of the Report sets out the Company’s Directors’ Remuneration Policy, which, subject to shareholder approval at the 2026
Annual General Meeting, shall take binding effect from the close of that meeting. This part of the Report is unaudited.
Remuneration policy for Executive Directors
Purpose and link to strategy Operation Maximum opportunity Performance metrics
Basic salary
To pay a competitive basic salary to attract,
retain and motivate the talent required to
operate and develop the Group’s businesses
and to develop and deliver the Group’s
strategy.
Basic salaries are ordinarily reviewed on
an annual basis considering a number of
factors including (but not limited to):
(i) scope of the role;
(ii) performance and experience of the
individual;
(iii) pay levels at comparable companies;
and
(iv) pay and conditions elsewhere in the
Group.
Basic salaries are also reviewed when an
individual changes role or responsibilities.
While no maximum salary level has been
set, salary increases will typically not exceed
the increases awarded to other employees
in the Group (in percentage of salary terms).
In appropriate circumstances, increases of
a higher amount may be made taking into
account individual circumstances such as:
an increase in scope or responsibility of
the individual’s role;
development of the individual
within the role (including enhanced
performance);
alignment to market level; and
a change in the size or complexity of the
business.
None, although overall performance of the
individual will be taken into consideration by
the Committee when setting and reviewing
salary levels.
Retirement benefits
To provide an opportunity for Executives to
build up income for retirement.
All Executive Directors are eligible to
participate in the Group Personal Pension
Scheme on the same terms as other
employees. In appropriate circumstances,
Executive Directors may receive a cash
allowance in lieu of a pension contribution,
or a combination of a pension contribution
and a cash allowance.
Pension contribution
The Group matches employee contributions
on a 2:1 basis with employer contributions
not exceeding 6% of basic salary. No
element other than basic salary is
pensionable.
Cash allowance
The maximum cash allowance (after
deducting any employer pension
contribution) is 6% of the basic salary.
The maximum pension contribution and/or
cash allowance may be increased to take
account of any increase to the retirement
benefits provision for the wider workforce.
The Committee retains discretion to
determine the approach and calculation of
the wider workforce retirement benefits
provision, including if relevant to the
methodology for international directors.
None.
Benefits
To provide market-competitive benefits.
Executive Directors receive benefits which
consist primarily of income protection in
the event of long-term ill health, private
healthcare insurance, death-in-service
benefits, and disturbance allowance.
Other benefits may be provided based on
individual circumstances, such as relocation
and travel expenses.
No maximum value of benefits has been
set as benefits vary by role. However, the
level of benefits provided is set at a level
which the Committee considers to be
sufficient based on the role and individual
circumstances.
None.
Graphics
49
Purpose and link to strategy Operation Maximum opportunity Performance metrics
Management Bonus Scheme
To incentivise and reward strong
performance against annual targets, thus
delivering value to shareholders.
The Committee assesses actual performance
compared to the performance targets
following the completion of the financial
year and determines the bonus payable to
each individual.
The Committee has discretion to amend
the pay-out should any formulaic outcome
not reflect the Committee’s assessment
of overall business performance or
if it considers the formulaic output
inappropriate in the context of
circumstances that were unexpected or
unforeseen.
For Executive Directors, 20% of any bonus
earned will be deferred into shares for a
period of two years, with the remainder
payable in cash. Deferred bonus awards
may take the form of nil (or nominal) cost
options, conditional awards of shares
or such other forms as having the same
economic effect.
An additional payment may be made in
respect of shares subject to deferred bonus
awards to reflect the value of dividends
paid over such period as the Committee
determines, ending no later than the date
of release (this payment may assume the
reinvestment of dividends into additional
shares on a cumulative basis).
Bonuses are subject to malus and clawback
provisions as referred to below the table.
The maximum annual opportunity is 150%
of salary.
Performance measures and targets (and
their weightings where there is more than
one measure) are set by the Committee on
an annual basis to reflect the Company’s
strategic priorities. At least 75% of the
opportunity will be based on key financial
measures, and any balance will be based on
non-financial measures.
Financial measures
Up to 50% of the maximum payable in
respect of a financial measure will be paid
for on target performance, increasing to
100% for stretch performance.
Non-financial measures
Vesting in respect of any non-financial
measure will be between 0% and 100%
based on the Committee’s assessment of
the extent to which the relevant measure
is achieved. Vesting in respect of any
non-financial measure will ordinarily be
subject to the satisfaction of a financial
performance underpin.
Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
50
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Purpose and link to strategy Operation Maximum opportunity Performance metrics
Performance Share Plan (“PSP”)
To drive sustained long-term performance
that supports the creation of shareholder
value.
The PSP is used to provide a meaningful
reward to Executive Directors linked to
the long-term success of the business, by
delivering annual awards in the form of
nil (or nominal)-cost options, conditional
awards of shares or such other form as has
the same economic effect.
Awards will be granted subject to
performance conditions, ordinarily assessed
over a period of at least three years, but will
not vest or become exercisable until the end
of a further holding period of two years.
Alternatively, awards may be granted on
the basis that the participant is entitled to
acquire shares following the assessment
of the applicable performance conditions
but that (other than as regards sales to
cover tax liabilities and any exercise price)
the award will not be “released” (so that
the participant is able to dispose of those
shares) until the end of the holding period.
The Committee has discretion to vary the
formulaic vesting outturn if it considers
that the outturn does not reflect the
Committee’s assessment of performance
or is not appropriate in the context of
circumstances that were unexpected or
unforeseen at grant.
An additional payment may be made in
respect of shares which vest under the
PSP to reflect the value of dividends over
such period as the Committee determines,
ending no later than the final day of
the holding period (this payment may
assume the reinvestment of dividends into
additional shares on a cumulative basis).
Awards under the PSP are subject to malus
and clawback provisions as referred to
below the table.
The Committee may, at its discretion,
structure awards as Qualifying PSP awards
comprising both a tax qualifying option and
an ordinary PSP award, with the ordinary
PSP award scaled back at exercise to take
account of any gain made on the exercise of
the tax qualifying option. The provisions of
the Policy apply to the tax qualifying option
to the extent permitted by the relevant tax
legislation.
The PSP provides awards of up to a
maximum limit of 125% of basic salary in
respect of any financial year of the Company
in normal circumstances.
In exceptional circumstances (such as on the
recruitment of a new Executive Director)
awards in respect of any financial year may
be granted at the level of up to 200% of
salary.
Where an award is granted as a Qualifying
PSP Award, the shares subject to the
tax qualifying option are not taken into
account for the purposes of these limits,
reflecting the “scale back” referred to in the
“Operation” column.
Vesting of PSP awards is subject to
performance against demanding
performance measures. Performance
metrics will ordinarily be based on financial
measures (such as EPS and TSR) and provide
for 25% of the award to vest for achieving a
threshold level of performance, with vesting
typically increasing on a straight line basis
to full vesting for meeting or exceeding a
stretching maximum level of performance.
Save As You Earn Scheme
To give all qualifying employees in the Group
the opportunity to buy shares.
All qualifying employees and Executive
Directors of the Group are invited to
participate on the same basis.
Awards in the United Kingdom must comply
with certain legislative requirements to
benefit from beneficial tax treatment.
Employees can save up to £500 per month
(or such higher amount as is permitted
under the relevant legislation) for a three-
or five-year period, and can then use those
savings to acquire shares at the end of the
period at an exercise price set at the start of
the savings contract at a discount of up to
20% to the market value of a share (or such
higher percentage as is permitted under
the applicable legislation). For employees
outside the UK, the maximum savings
amount is substantially equivalent to the UK
maximum.
None.
Graphics
51
Notes to the Policy Table
Selection of performance measures
The performance measures under the Management Bonus Scheme and PSP are selected to reflect the main KPIs and strategic
priorities for the Group. The Committee’s policy is to set performance targets which are both stretching and achievable and that
the maximum outcomes are only available for outstanding performance.
Performance conditions applying to subsisting awards may be amended or substituted by the Committee if the Committee
considers that it would be appropriate to do so (for example, to take account of a change in strategy, a material acquisition or
divestment of a Group business or a change in prevailing market conditions) because the measures are no longer appropriate and
amendment is required in order that they achieve their original purpose.
Operation of share plans
The Committee has discretion to operate the Company’s share plans (including the PSP, the Deferred Bonus Plan, the Save As
You Earn Scheme and the International Sharesave Scheme) in accordance with their terms, including the ability to settle awards,
in whole or in part, in cash and to adjust the terms of awards in the event of any variation of the Company’s share capital or any
demerger, delisting, special dividend or other relevant event. The Committee has no intention to settle any Executive Director’s
award in cash and would do so only in exceptional circumstances, such as where there was a regulatory restriction on the delivery
of shares, or in respect of any tax liability arising in respect of an award.
Shareholding guidelines
During employment, Executive Directors are expected to acquire and retain shares with a value equal to 200% of their base salary,
by the end of the three-year period following their appointment to the Board. Directors are not expected to acquire shares in the
market in order to meet this guideline but instead are expected to retain shares acquired through the Group’s share plans in order
to meet this shareholding guideline. Shares subject to PSP awards which have vested but which remain subject to a holding period,
shares subject to vested but unexercised PSP awards and shares subject to deferred bonus awards count towards the guideline
on a net of assumed tax basis. Shareholdings will be valued on an annual basis at 31 December for the purpose of this guideline.
Other senior executives must retain half of the after-tax number of shares they acquire pursuant to the Performance Share Plan
until the day that their shareholding has a value equal to their basic salary.
The Company adopted a post-employment shareholding requirement during 2020. Shares are subject to this requirement only if
they are acquired from share plan awards (Performance Share Plan or deferred bonuses) granted after 1 January 2020. Following
employment, an Executive Director must retain:
until the audit sign-off of the financial statements for the year in which they leave the business, such of their shares which
are subject to the post-employment requirement as are equal to the shareholding guideline that applies during employment
(currently 200% of salary); and
until the audit sign-off of the financial statements for the following year, such of those shares as are equal to 50% of the
shareholding guideline that applies during employment; or in either case and if fewer, all of those shares.
The Committee retains discretion to vary the application of the shareholding guidelines in exceptional circumstances.
Malus and clawback
Malus may be applied before a bonus is paid or before the assessment of performance conditions in relation to a PSP award.
Clawback may be applied to a cash bonus after it has been paid and to a Deferred Bonus Plan award before it vests. Clawback may
be applied to a cash bonus for up to two years after payment and to a PSP award for up to two years following the assessment of
performance conditions (i.e. up to the end of the two year holding period).
Malus and clawback may be applied in the event of a material misstatement of accounts, an error in assessing performance
conditions, misconduct on the part of the participant, fraud, malpractice, corporate failure, serious reputational damage or a
material failure of risk management.
Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
52
Remuneration policy for Non-Executive Directors
The Policy for Non-Executive Directors is set by the Board having taken account of the fees in other companies of similar size and
the limits set in the Company’s Articles of Association. When recruiting Non-Executive Directors, the remuneration offered will
be in line with the Policy table below.
Purpose and link to strategy Operation Maximum opportunity Performance measures
Fees
To attract and retain Non-Executive
Directors of the highest calibre with broad
commercial and other experience relevant
to the Company.
Each Non-Executive Director is paid a basic
fee. Additional fees are payable for acting
as Senior Independent Director and as Chair
of the Nomination, Audit and Remuneration
Committees and may be paid for other roles
or increased time commitments.
The fees paid to the Non-Executive
Directors are determined by the Board.
Fee levels are determined by reference
to fees paid to Non-Executive Directors in
similar sized businesses and the expected
time commitment and complexity of the
role.
The Non-Executive Directors are not
eligible to participate in the Company’s
performance-related incentive plans or
pension arrangements, although their fees
may be paid in cash or shares (which may
include a non-performance based nil or
nominal cost award over Company shares,
which may incorporate a right to “dividend
equivalents” over the award’s vesting
period).
Non-Executive Directors may be eligible
to receive benefits such as the use of
secretarial support, travel costs, and
other benefits that may be considered
appropriate. Reimbursed expenses may
include a gross-up to reflect any tax
or social security due in respect of the
reimbursement.
Non-Executive Director fees are typically
reviewed by the Board every year with any
adjustments ordinarily effective from 1 April
each year.
Increases typically do not exceed those
of the wider workforce, however, in
appropriate circumstances, increases of a
higher amount may be made taking into
account individual circumstances such as:
an increase in scope or responsibility of
the individual’s role;
alignment to market level; and
a change in the size or complexity of the
business.
The maximum aggregate fees for all
Non-Executive Directors will remain within
the limit permitted by the Company’s
Articles of Association from time to time or
as otherwise approved by shareholders.
None.
Remuneration policy for other employees across the Group
The Company’s approach to annual salary reviews is consistent across the Group, with consideration given to the scope of the
role, level of experience, responsibility, individual performance and pay levels in comparable companies. Interim salary reviews
are typically only proposed where an employee has a change in role or the scope of their role increases.
The Group offers four variable pay schemes to permanent employees of the Group who do not participate in the Management
Bonus Scheme. These are the Sales Commission Plans, the Consultants’ Bonus Scheme, the Variable Compensation Scheme, and
the Performance Excellence Bonus. Employees participate in one of these schemes only.
All employees are eligible for potential inclusion in the PSP (subject to approval by the Remuneration Committee) and are eligible
to receive option grants, either subject to performance conditions or as “restricted stock units” as described on pages 132 to 134.
All qualifying employees are offered the opportunity to save and buy shares through the Save As You Earn Scheme or International
Sharesave Scheme up to the same maximum level (or substantially equivalent maximum level for employees outside the United
Kingdom), thus giving them the opportunity to be shareholders. Alex Curran does not currently intend to participate in the Save
As You Earn Scheme.
Illustrations of the application of the Executive Directors’ Remuneration Policy
The following chart sets out an illustration in line with the Policy set out above of the potential remuneration in 2026 for Alex
Curran. The charts show the potential split between the different elements of remuneration under four different performance
scenarios: ‘minimum’, ‘on-target’, ‘maximum’, and ‘maximum’ with an assumed 50% share price increase.
Potential reward opportunities are based on the Policy. The salary for 2026 has been finalised at $485,000 converted into £360,364
based on the FX rate at 31 December 2025, with pension and incentive opportunities based on this salary. Benefits are based on
the 2025 benefits figure from the single total figure of remuneration table on page 57.
Graphics
53
The ‘minimum’ scenario shows basic salary, pension and benefits (i.e. fixed remuneration) which are the only elements of the
Executive Directors’ remuneration packages which are not at risk.
The ‘on-target’ scenario reflects fixed remuneration as above plus a target payout of 75% of salary from the Management Bonus
Scheme (i.e. 75% of salary, 150% of salary being the maximum). In this scenario, it is assumed that Alex Curran is granted a PSP
award of a value equivalent to 125% of her basic salary with 25% of the salary ultimately vesting.
The ‘maximum’ scenario reflects fixed remuneration as above plus full vesting of the Management Bonus Scheme (150% of salary).
In this scenario, it is assumed that Alex Curran is granted a PSP award of a value equivalent to 125% of her basic salary with the
full award ultimately vesting.
The ‘maximum with an assumed 50% share price increase’ is based on the same assumptions as for the ‘maximum’ scenario, but
with an assumed 50% increase in the share price for the purposes of the PSP element.
Alex Curran
£0
£250
£500
£750
£1000
£1250
£1500
£1750
£2000
100% 52%
35%
£764k
On-target
performance
£404k
Minimum
performance
Salary, pension and benefits
Total remuneration £000
Performance Share Plan
Management Bonus Scheme
Performance Share Plan
Award share appreciation (50%)
12%
29%
39%
£1,395k
Maximum
performance
32%
24%
28%
14%
33%
£1,620k
Maximum
performance
(with 50% share
price increase)
Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
54
Approach to Recruitment of Directors
Executive Directors
When hiring a new Executive Director, or promoting to the Board from within the Group, the Committee will typically align the
package with the above Policy. The Committee may, in order to secure the services of a candidate with the suitable skills to
execute the Company’s strategy, include other elements of pay; however, this discretion is capped and subject to the principles
set out below. The maximum level of variable remuneration that may be granted (excluding any “buy-out” award as referred to
below) is 350% of salary (assuming a 150% of salary annual bonus, and a PSP award at the exceptional limit of 200% of salary which
would only be awarded where necessary to secure a candidate of appropriate quality and experience). Where the Company has
made contractual commitments to an individual prior to their promotion to the Board, the Company will continue to honour these
remuneration arrangements.
Component Approach
Basic salary The basic salaries of new appointees will be determined by reference to the experience and skills of the individual, internal relativities, their current
basic salary, and relevant market data. Where new appointees have initial basic salaries set below a market competitive level, it may be increased to
a market competitive rate over such a period as the Committee determines, subject to their development in the role.
Retirement benefits Retirement benefits will be determined in accordance with the Policy table above.
Benefits Benefits will be determined in accordance with the Policy table above, and may include relocation, travel and subsistence payments in appropriate
circumstances.
Management Bonus Scheme The scheme described in the Policy table will apply to new appointees with the relevant maximum ordinarily being pro-rated to reflect the
proportion of employment over the year. Any non-financial performance measures will be tailored towards the individual Executive Director.
PSP New appointees who have been invited to participate in the PSP will be granted awards as described in the Policy table. In accordance with the
Policy table and the plan rules, in exceptional circumstances in order to enable the Company to recruit an Executive with the experience and skills to
execute the Company’s strategy, awards may be granted up to the level of 200% of salary.
Save As You Earn Scheme New appointees will be invited to participate in the SAYE Scheme on the same basis as other employees and Executive Directors.
In determining appropriate remuneration packages for new Executive Directors, the Committee will take into consideration all
relevant factors (including quantum, the nature of remuneration and where the candidate was recruited from) to ensure that the
arrangements are in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders.
An Executive Director may be recruited at a point in a financial year when it would be inappropriate to provide a bonus or long-
term incentive award for that year (for example, because there would not be sufficient time to assess performance). In these
circumstances, subject to the limit on variable remuneration set out above, the quantum of that Executive Director’s bonus or
long-term incentive award in respect of the months employed during that financial year may be transferred to the subsequent
financial year so that the Executive Director is rewarded on a fair and reasonable basis. The Committee may choose to recognise
benefits received by the Executive Director in their previous engagement.
The Committee may alter the performance measures and weightings and vesting, deferral and holding periods of the Management
Bonus Scheme and long-term incentive award if the Committee considers that the circumstances of the recruitment merit such an
alteration – the rationale will be clearly explained in a subsequent Directors’ Remuneration Report.
In addition, the Committee reserves the right to make an award in respect of a new appointment to ‘buy out’ remuneration
arrangements forfeited on leaving a previous engagement. In doing so, the Committee will consider relevant factors including
any performance conditions and the likelihood of those conditions being met. The Committee will generally seek to structure any
buy-out awards or payments on a comparable basis to the forfeited arrangements and to limit any such award to the expected
value of the forfeited arrangements.
Share awards will be granted under the Company’s existing share plans as far as possible, but the Company may adopt additional
arrangements as permitted by the Listing Rules to facilitate the recruitment of an Executive Director.
Non-Executive Directors
In recruiting a new Non-Executive Director, the Committee will use the Policy as set out in the table on page 48. A basic fee
in line with the prevailing fee schedule would be payable for Board membership, with additional fees payable for acting as
Senior Independent Director or Chair of the Audit, Remuneration or Nomination Committees or other responsibilities or time
commitments as appropriate.
Graphics
55
Directors’ Service Contracts
Executive Director service contracts, including arrangements for early termination, are carefully considered by the Committee.
Alex Curran has a rolling service contract with the Group which can be terminated with written notice in accordance with the
table below. Such contracts provide for an obligation to pay salary plus pension and benefits for any portion of the notice period
waived by the Group. Executive Director service contracts are available to view at the Company’s registered office. The Committee
reserves the right to offer a notice period of up to 12 months in the case of any Executive Director appointed after the approval
of this Policy, provided that the length of the notice period would be the same whether given by the Executive Director or the
Company.
Executive Director
Date of service
contract
Notice period from the
individual Notice period from the employer
Alex Curran 29 April 2024 6 months 6 months
The table below summarises how the awards under the Management Bonus Scheme and long-term incentives are typically treated
in specific circumstances:
Reason for leaving Treatment
Management Bonus Scheme
Retirement, ill-health, disability, death,
redundancy or other reasons at the
discretion of the Committee
The Committee may consider it appropriate to award a bonus depending on the relevant termination scenario. The payment of any
bonus will be subject to the satisfaction of the relevant performance conditions and will ordinarily be reduced to reflect the proportion
of the bonus year for which the Executive Director was in service (although the Committee has discretion to waive this time-based
reduction).
Any such bonus will typically be paid following the end of the bonus year, although the Committee retains discretion to pay the bonus at
the date of cessation (and to assess performance conditions accordingly).
Other reason Awards lapse on the date of termination.
Deferred Bonus Awards
Gross misconduct Awards lapse on the date of termination.
Other reason Awards will ordinarily continue and become exercisable on the ordinary vesting date, although the Committee retains discretion to
release any such award on the date of termination in appropriate circumstances (such as in the event of cessation due to death or ill-
health). In either case, the award will vest in full, unless the Committee determines the award should vest on a pro-rata basis to take
account of the proportion of the deferral period that has elapsed at termination.
Performance Share Plan
Death Awards can be exercised within 12 months from the date of death (or, if the Committee so decides, from a later date, not being later
than the date on which the award would ordinarily have vested) on a pro-rata basis (by reference to the proportion of the performance
period that has elapsed) and to the extent that performance conditions have been met (as assessed by the Committee where awards
vest before the end of the original performance period). However, the Committee reserves the right to disapply pro-rating.
Ill-health, disability, or redundancy, or
any other reason at the discretion of the
Committee
Cessation during the performance period
Awards will ordinarily continue and can be exercised within 6 months from the vesting date at the end of the holding period on a pro-
rata basis (by reference to the proportion of the performance period that has elapsed) and to the extent that performance conditions
have been met. However, the Committee reserves the right to disapply pro-rating and to allow the early vesting and exercise of an
award at the date of cessation (and to assess performance conditions accordingly) or at some other date such as following the end of the
performance period if the award would otherwise be subject to a holding period.
Cessation during the holding period
Awards will ordinarily continue and can be exercised within 6 months from the vesting date at the end of the holding period to the extent
that performance conditions have been met. However, the Committee reserves the right to allow the vesting and early exercise of the
award at the date of cessation.
Other reason
Cessation during the performance period
Awards lapse on the date of termination.
Cessation during the holding period
Awards will ordinarily continue and can be exercised within 6 months from the ordinary vesting date at the end of the holding period
to the extent that performance conditions have been met, unless the cessation is due to misconduct in which case the award will
lapse. Where the cessation is other than due to misconduct, the Committee reserves the right to permit the award to vest and become
exercisable at the date of cessation.
Change of control
Awards under the PSP may vest and be exercised early on the change of control or other relevant event, or awards may be
exchanged for awards in a new company. Where awards vest, they can be exercised on a pro-rata basis (by reference to the
proportion of the performance period that has elapsed) and to the extent that performance conditions have been met (as assessed
by the Committee), although the Committee reserves the right to disapply pro-rating. Awards under the DBP will vest on a change
of control or other relevant corporate event (or may be exchanged for awards in a new company). Options under the Save As You
Earn Scheme or International Sharesave Scheme may vest early in the event of a change of control to the extent permitted by the
rules of the scheme (or may be exchanged for new options); the rules of the scheme do not permit the exercise of discretion as to
the treatment on a change of control.
Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
56
Other payments
In appropriate circumstances, payments may also be made in respect of accrued holiday, legal fees and outplacement services.
The Committee reserves the right to make any other payments in connection with a Director’s cessation of office of employment
where the payments are made in good faith in discharge of an existing legal obligation (or by way of damages for breach of such
an obligation) or by way of settlement of any claim arising in connection with the cessation. In appropriate circumstances, the
Committee may agree that certain benefits (such as medical insurance) may be continued for a reasonable period following
termination of employment.
Non-Executive Directors’ Terms of Appointment
Subject to annual re-election by shareholders, Non-Executive Directors are appointed for an initial term of approximately three
years. Subsequent terms of three years may be awarded. Details of the Non-Executive Directors’ terms of appointment are shown
in the table below and copies of the Non-Executive Directors’ terms of appointment are available to view at the Company’s
registered office. The appointment, re-appointment and the remuneration of Non-Executive Directors are matters reserved for
the full Board.
Initial agreement date Date of appointment
Expiry date of current
agreement
Ivan Martin
1
21 October 2015 1 January 2016 27 May 2026
2
Sara Dickinson 30 September 2021 1 October 2021 1 October 2027
Paula Dowdy 14 May 2025 28 May 2025 28 May 2028
1 As announced on 1 October 2024, Ivan Martin will step down from the Board following the 2026 AGM.
2 Subject to the completion of the Strategic Review. See the Chairman's Statement.
Legacy arrangements
The Committee reserves the right to make any remuneration payment and/or payment for loss of office (including exercising any
discretions available to it in connection with such payments) notwithstanding that they are not in line with the Policy set out above
where the terms of the payment were agreed:
1. before the Policy came into effect (and, in the case of a payment agreed on or after 28 April 2014, where the terms of the
payment are in line with the directors’ remuneration policy applying at the date at which the payment was agreed); or
2. at a time when the relevant individual was not a director of the Company (or other person to whom the Policy set out above
applies) and, in the opinion of the Committee, the payment was not in consideration for the individual becoming a director
(or other such person) of the Company.
For these purposes, the term “payment” includes the satisfaction of awards of variable remuneration and in relation to an award
over shares the terms of the payment are agreed at the time the award is granted.
Executive Directors – External appointments
An Executive Director may accept external appointments of non-executive directorship in order to broaden their experience for
the benefit of the Company. Such appointments are subject to approval by the Board in each case, and the Executive Director may
retain any fees paid in respect of such a directorship.
Consideration of conditions elsewhere in the Company
Although the Committee does not consult directly with employees on Executive Director remuneration policy, the Committee does
consider general basic salary increases across the Company, remuneration arrangements and employment conditions, such as
pension arrangements, for the broader employee population when determining remuneration policy for the Executive Directors.
Consideration of shareholder views
The Committee is committed to an open and transparent dialogue with shareholders on matters relating to remuneration. When
determining remuneration, the Committee takes into account views of shareholders and investor guidelines. The Committee is
always open to feedback from shareholders on remuneration policy and arrangements and commits to undergoing shareholder
consultation in advance of any significant changes to remuneration policy.
Graphics
57
B. ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION
The following section provides details of how the Company’s Remuneration Policy was implemented during the year ended
31 December 2025 along with information on how the Policy is to be applied in 2026 and other required disclosures. The sections
of the report which are audited are clearly identified as such in the section heading.
Single total figure of remuneration (audited)
Executive Director
The table below sets out a single figure for the total remuneration received by the Executive Director for the year ended
31 December 2025 and the prior year.
Alex Curran Mike Johns
3
2025
1
£
2024
1
£
2025
£
2024
£
Basic Salary 309,512 315,823 48,013 175,000
Taxable Benefits
2
29,179 9,779
Pension 7,246 8,006 2,437 10,500
Management Bonus
4
71,748 68,056
Other Bonus
5
15,000
Long Term Incentives
5
Total 417,685 401,664 65,450 185,500
Total Fixed Remuneration 345,937 333,608 65,450 185,500
Total Variable Remuneration 71,748 68,056
1. As Alex is paid in USD, her monthly fixed remuneration has been converted to GBP based on the FX rates at each month end. Her management bonus has been converted to GBP
based on the FX rate at 31 December 2025.
2. Taxable benefits consist of private healthcare insurance and disturbance allowance.
3. Mike Johns stepped down as Director of the Company on 25 March 2025. He received his full basic salary, pension and benefits up until that date. Information in relation to certain
other payments made to him is set out on page 60.
4. See page 58 for details of bonuses earned under the Management Bonus Scheme in respect of 2025.
5. Mike Johns received a one-off bonus in 2025 relating to the achievement of certain milestones while he was working through his notice period.
6. See page 59 for details of remuneration earned from long- term incentives during 2025.
Non-Executive Directors
The table below sets out a single figure for the total remuneration received by each Non-Executive Director (including Ivan Martin,
Non-Executive Chairman) who served during the year ended 31 December 2025 and the prior year. As the Non-Executive Directors
do not participate in any variable remuneration arrangement, separate sub-totals for fixed and variable remuneration are not
included.
Ivan Martin Sara Dickinson Paula Dowdy
2
Barbara Moorhouse
3
2025
£
2024
£
2025
£
2024
£
2025
£
2024
£
2025
£
2024
£
Basic Salary
1
166,233 162,575 53,661 52,480 31,774 n/a 21,530 52,480
Committee Chair/SID Fees 6,570 6,570 9,330 9,330 11,533 n/a 6,700 16,330
Total 172,803 169,145 62,991 61,810 43,307 n/a 28,230 68,810
1. Non-Executive Directors’ fees were not increased effective 1 April 2025 as disclosed in the 2024 Directors’ Remuneration Report.
2. Paula Dowdy was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 28 May 2025.
3. Barbara Moorhouse stepped down from the Board on 28 May 2025.
Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
58
Incentive outcomes for the year ended 31 December 2025 (audited)
Management Bonus Scheme
The Committee’s approach to the determination of bonuses for the Executive Directors in respect of 2025 is set out in the
statement from the Chair of the Committee on page 45. As described in that statement, each Executive Director was awarded a
maximum bonus opportunity of 125% of their salary (the “Management Bonus”).
As in previous years, the Committee determined that 75% of the Management Bonus opportunity for each Executive Director
would be based on performance against financial metrics, being a combination of Annual Recurring Revenue (“ARR”), Revenue
and Operating Profit (equal weighting of 25% each), with the remaining 25% based on non-financial objectives specific to each
individual.
Financial performance measures (75% of the bonus opportunity)
The table below sets out the targets, performance against them, and the amount of bonus earned by Alex Curran by reference to
Company performance against financial measures.
Bonus Measure Weighting
Threshold at
which bonuses
accrued
On-target
performance
level
Stretch
performance
level
Actual
performance
level
Amount of
bonus earned
(% of salary)
Management Bonus Annual Recurring
Revenue
1
25% of the
financial measures
opportunity
£53.2m £54.8m £56.4m £50.8m
Revenue 25% of the
financial measures
opportunity
£68.6m £70.0m £71.4m £65.0m
Profit
2
25% of the
financial measures
opportunity
£10.0m £10.3m £11.0m £10.3m £47,071
Total Bonus earned £47,071
1. The recurring revenue base target was set on a constant currency basis, using a planned conversion rate from USD of 1.296. The actual reported result of £49.8m million was
converted using the prevailing year end USD rate of 1.346 to represent the recurring revenue translated at the planned rate for comparison against target.
2. Operating profit has been adjusted to remove the impact of any non-underlying items. The target and actual operating profit amounts are shown prior to any adjustments for the
Management Bonus Scheme.
Non-financial performance measures (25% of the bonus opportunity for both
the Management Bonus and the Chief Executive Bonus)
A summary of the Committee’s assessment of the CEO’s performance against the key strategic goals is set out below.
Alex Curran
Measure Committee assessment of performance
Develop relationships with existing partners to enable
them to deliver scalable growth.
Relationships with existing partners have deepened in the year, allowing an increase in the rate of new
business sourced through partnerships in the year and exceeding the targeted rate.
Deliver product-market fit for Fynapse. The business has been re-organised to centre around the Fynapse opportunity, and further steps will be
taken in 2026 to complete this alignment. There has been positive new business success with Fynapse
in the year, including new business wins and conversions of existing clients.
Satisfy our clients by reinforcing existing product
capabilities and providing exceptional service.
Organisational changes made in the year have delivered positive change to the client experience, and
this has been demonstrated by reducing levels of software churn in the year.
Become a high performing organisation. Performance management processes have been tightened and enhanced to identify and manage both
high and low performers, while minimising the level of regrettable leavers.
Overall, the Committee concluded that, in light of the progress made against objectives, Alex Curran would receive a bonus of
£24,677 under the non-financial element of the 2025 bonus, reflecting an overall assessment of performance against the personal
objectives set of between threshold and on-target. Overall, this resulted in a total 2025 bonus being earned by Alex Curran of
£71,748.
20% of the bonus payment is subject to a deferral period of two years and payable in shares. A Deferred bonus award will be
granted to Alex Curran following the release of the 2025 Annual Results. The award is not subject to any additional performance
conditions and is treated on cessation of employment in accordance with the Directors' Remuneration Policy.
Graphics
59
PSP awards vesting in respect of performance in 2024 (audited)
The PSP awards granted on 22 November 2022 were subject to i) 75% relative TSR performance for the three-year period which
ends on 22 November 2025; and ii) 25% EPS growth for the three years ended 31 December 2024. The Remuneration Committee
confirmed that these awards achieved nil vesting, as the Company’s EPS growth was less than 16.4p per share and TSR in the
performance period was below the median of the constituents of the FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts).
PSP awards vesting in respect of performance in 2025 (audited)
The PSP awards granted on 6 September 2023 were subject to i) 75% relative TSR performance for the three-year period which
ends on 6 September 2026; and ii) 25% EPS growth for the three years ended 31 December 2025. The Remuneration Committee
confirmed that the EPS growth was below threshold and therefore this element of the award vested at 0%.
Share awards granted during the year (audited)
On 18 September 2025 share options under the Performance Share Plan were awarded to Alex Curran. Each award was granted
in the form of an option with an exercise price of 7 1/3 pence per share. The awards were made at 125% of salary, in line with the
Remuneration Policy approved by shareholders at the 2023 AGM. The Remuneration Committee will consider the vesting outturns
determined by reference to the performance conditions and retains discretion in relation to the total level of reward arising from
the 2025 award having regard to overall Company performance, the wider stakeholder experience, and the outcome of prior year
PSP schemes.
Executive Director
Number of shares
subject to award Basis of award
Face value of
award
1
% of award vesting
for threshold
performance
Alex Curran 126,507 125% of salary £379,521
2
25%
1. Based on a share price of £3.00 being the average of the mid-market closing share price on the three days prior to the date of grant.
2. As Alex’s salary is in USD, a USD: GBP FX rate of 0.74 was applied, representing the FX rate at the month’s end prior to the granting of awards.
The vesting of these options is subject to the satisfaction of the performance conditions based on:
(a) as regards 75% of the shares subject to the options, the Company’s Total Shareholder Return (‘TSR’) measured over the
period of three years commencing on the date of grant, compared with the TSR of a comparator group consisting of the
companies constituting the FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts) as follows:
Rank of the Company’s TSR against the TSR of the members of the
comparator Group
Percentage of the options subject to the TSR performance
condition that vests
Below median 0%
Median 25%
Between median and upper quartile Determined on a straight-line basis between 25% and 100%
Upper quartile 100%
(b) as regards the other 25% of the shares subject to the options, the Company’s diluted Earnings Per Share (EPS) for the 2027
financial year, being the final financial year of the EPS performance period, as follows:
Diluted EPS for the final year of the performance period
Percentage of the options subject to the EPS performance
condition that vests
16.98 pence 25%
Between 16.98 pence and 19.53 pence Between 25% and 100%
19.53 pence or more 100%
The awards are also subject to a further underpin condition. No element of any award will vest unless the Committee determines
that the level of vesting reflects the overall financial performance of the Group over the performance period.
These awards are subject to a two-year holding period following the end of the performance period.

Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
60
Termination payments and payments to past Directors (audited)
Jeremy Suddards
Jeremy Suddards, former Chief Executive Officer, stepped down as a Director of the Company on 27 July 2023 and his final date of
employment with the Aptitude Group was 31 July 2023. As reported in the 2023 Directors’ Remuneration Report, Jeremy retained
his outstanding DBP and PSP awards. In accordance with the rules of the plans, the final remaining DBP awards vested on 18 April
2025 (3,843 shares acquired).
Philip Wood
Philip Wood, former Deputy Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, stepped down from the Board on 20 July 2023. As
reported in the 2023 Directors’ Remuneration Report, Philip retained his outstanding DBP and PSP awards. In accordance with the
rules of the plans, the final remaining DBP awards vested on 18 April 2025 (2,864 shares acquired).
Mike Johns
Mike Johns, former Chief Financial Officer, stepped down as a Director of the Company on 25 March 2025 and his final date of
employment with the Aptitude Group was the same day. After this date Mike received £15,000 in respect of a bonus agreed as
part of Mike’s settlement agreement.
He was not eligible to earn a bonus for the proportion of 2025 for which he was employed.
In line with the Company’s Remuneration Policy, Mike retained his outstanding DBP award granted to him in 2024 and the PSP
awards granted to him between 2022 and 2024. As stated earlier in the Directors’ Remuneration Report, the performance period
for the PSP awards granted in 2022 has now ended and the awards lapsed in full.

Graphics
61
Implementation of Remuneration Policy for 2026
Basic salary
As explained on page 46, the base salary of Alex Curran will be increased in 2026 to $485,000.
As further explained on page 47, Alex Curran will receive an additional allowance, which will not be taken into account for pension,
bonus, or PSP purposes.
Management Bonus Scheme
For 2026 the maximum bonus opportunity for Executive Directors will be 150% of salary, with 75% of the maximum paid for on
target performance.
Bonuses will be based on performance compared to a number of financial metrics (as regards 75% of the overall opportunity) and
the achievement of a number of non-financial performance measures set for the year (as regards 25% of the overall opportunity).
The financial metrics are expected to include Operating Profit, Revenue and Annual Recurring Revenue growth. The non-financial
performance measures will be subject to a financial underpin. In the view of the Committee the measures and targets are
commercially sensitive as they give competitors information in relation to the Company’s targets and plans. Information will be
disclosed when no longer considered commercially sensitive, as with the disclosure of the 2025 bonus outturn on page 58.
20% of any bonus earned will be deferred into shares for a period of two years. Deferred shares will be granted following
announcement of the Company’s results by which the bonus payment was determined. An additional payment may also be made
in shares to reflect the value of any dividends paid during the two-year deferral period.
Long-term incentives
Awards under the PSP will be granted to Executive Directors in 2026. Under the Remuneration Policy, the maximum grant of PSP
for Executive Directors is 150% of salary, except in exceptional circumstances (such as on the recruitment of a new Executive
Director) where awards may be granted at the level of up to 200% of salary. In 2026 the maximum PSP opportunity will remain at
125% of salary. The performance measures will include a relative TSR measure for at least 50% of the award and at least one other
financial metric, such as EPS. The TSR performance measure will compare the Company’s TSR performance with a comparator
group consisting of the FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts), with 25% of the TSR element vesting for performance
at median, rising to 100% for upper-quartile performance. TSR performance will be assessed over the three-year period from the
date of grant. Details of the other financial measure (and of the associated targets) and of the weightings between the measures
will be disclosed both at grant and in the 2026 Directors’ Remuneration Report. Targets will be set to ensure that full vesting
requires the achievement of stretching levels of performance, with threshold performance delivering 25% vesting.
The awards will be subject to a two-year holding period following the end of the performance period, at the end of which they will
vest and can be exercised.
An additional payment will also be made in shares to reflect the value of any dividends paid during the two-year holding period.
In line with market practice, the Committee has determined that Redundancy will not be an automatic Good Leaver circumstance,
as reflected in the rules of the scheme.
Non-Executive Director fees
For 2026, the Committee reviewed the Chairman’s fee and the Board of Directors reviewed the fees for the other Non-Executive
Directors. Following these reviews, the Chairman's fee and the Basic Non-Executive Director fee were increased by 3%, as per the
table below.
Fee at 1 April
2025
Fee at 1 April
2026
Chairman £167,452 £173,313
Basic Non-Executive Director fee £54,054 £55,946
Audit Committee Chair fee £9,330 £9,657
Remuneration Committee Chair fee £9,810 £10,153
Senior Independent Director fee £9,810 £10,153
Nomination Committee Chair fee £6,570 £6,800
The Board of Directors meets without the Non-Executive Directors present to review the Non-Executive Director and Non-
Executive Chairman fees and these are set with consideration to salary increases received by the wider workforce.

Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
62
Percentage change in Directors’ remuneration
The table below shows the percentage change in Directors’ remuneration from the prior year compared to the average percentage
change in remuneration for all other employees. The reporting regulations require that the average percentage change for other
employees is based on the employees of Aptitude Software Group plc. However, the Company only has two employees other than
the Directors. Therefore, to provide a meaningful comparison, and consistent with the approach in prior years, this is based on all
United Kingdom employees in the Group, which is considered the most appropriate comparator group. For the purposes of this
disclosure, remuneration comprises salary, benefits (excluding pension) and annual bonus earned in respect of variable pay paid
in the year only.
Financial
year
2, 3
Salary Taxable benefits Single year variable
Executive Directors
1
Alex Curran 2024 - 2025 (0.8%) 230.8% 127.2%
2023 - 2024 136.4% 66.68% 124%
Non-Executive Directors
Ivan Martin
4
2024 - 2025 2.16% N/A N/A
2023 - 2024 0.92% N/A N/A
2022 - 2023 4.2% N/A N/A
2021 - 2022 6.7% N/A N/A
2020 - 2021 6.8% N/A N/A
2019 - 2020 0.0% N/A N/A
Sara Dickinson
5
2024 - 2025 1.91% N/A N/A
2023 - 2024 0.92% N/A N/A
2022 - 2023 7.4% N/A N/A
2021 - 2022 19.9% N/A N/A
2020 - 2021 N/A N/A N/A
2019 - 2020 N/A N/A N/A
Other employees
6
2024 - 2025 4.3% (0.6%) 20.2%
2023 - 2024 0.92% N/A N/A
2022 - 2023 9.8% 7.9% (1.3%)
2021 - 2022 7.7% 29.6% 106.3%
2020 - 2021 4.3% 22.0% 0.6%
2019 - 2020 1.6% 3.0% 34.1%
1. Alex Curran joined the Board on 12 July 2023.
2. Explanatory notes relating to the prior year figures are included in the relevant year’s Directors’ Remuneration Report.
3. Paula Dowdy joined the Board on 28 May 2025 and therefore there is no comparative to measure against and so it is not included in the above table.
4. The salary received by Ivan Martin during 2021 and 2022 included the addition of a fee for Chairing the Nomination Committee.
5. Sara Dickinson was appointed on 1 October 2021 and therefore her 2021 salary has been annualised for comparative purposes.
6. Based on the United Kingdom employees only as the most appropriate comparator group.

Graphics
63
Relative importance of spend on pay
The table below shows the percentage change in spend on pay and shareholder distributions (i.e. dividends) from the financial
year ended 31 December 2024 to the financial year ended 31 December 2025, based upon continuing operations.
% change
2025
£000
2024
£000
Return to shareholders in year (2.7%) 2,999 3,081
Employee remuneration (20.4%) 32,375 40,673
Comparison of Company performance
The following graph shows the Company’s performance, measured by total shareholder return, compared with the performance
of the FTSE SmallCap Index for the ten years ended 31 December 2025. The Committee considers that the FTSE SmallCap Index is
the most appropriate comparison across the period given the similarities between the Company and the companies forming this
index.
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
Dec 2015 Dec 2016 Dec 2017 Dec 2018 Dec 2019 Dec 2020 Dec 2021 Dec 2022 Dec 2023 Dec 2024 Dec 2025
Value of £100 invested on 31 December 2015
Aptitude FTSE SmallCap
Total Shareholder Return (rebased to £100)

Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
64
Table of historic remuneration
The table below details the total remuneration, bonus award as a percentage of maximum opportunity and long-term incentive
awards vesting as a percentage of maximum opportunity for the Group’s senior executive officer(s) for each of the years from
2014 - 2025 (inclusive).
Year Total Remuneration
Bonus Award as
a percentage
of maximum
opportunity
Long term
incentives vesting
as a percentage
of maximum
opportunity
2025 Alex Curran (Chief Executive Officer)
1
£417,685 18.75% n/a
1
2024 Alex Curran (Chief Executive Officer) £401,664 17.08% n/a
2023 Alex Curran (Chief Executive Officer) £197,287 19.39% n/a
Jeremy Suddards (Chief Executive Officer) £199,748 n/a n/a
2022 Jeremy Suddards (Chief Executive Officer) £391,593 16.69% n/a
2021 Jeremy Suddards (Chief Executive Officer) £578,407 46.90% 43.2%
2020 Jeremy Suddards (Chief Executive Officer) £387,630 78.67% 26.60%
2019 Tom Crawford (Chief Executive Officer, Aptitude Software Group plc) £1,634,545 0.00% 100.00%/
75.50%
2018 Simon Baines (Chief Executive Officer, Microgen Financial Systems) £776,610 0.00% 100.00%
Tom Crawford (Chief Executive Officer, Aptitude Software) £858,130 0.00% 100.00%
2017 Simon Baines (Chief Executive Officer, Microgen Financial Systems) £270,075 35.25% n/a
Tom Crawford (Chief Executive Officer, Aptitude Software) £433,437 86.25% n/a
2016 Simon Baines (Chief Executive Officer, Microgen Financial Systems) £1,141,653 50.00% 98.53%
Tom Crawford (Chief Executive Officer, Aptitude Software) £1,269,113 92.50% 98.53%
2015 Martyn Ratcliffe (Executive Chairman) £199,375 n/a n/a
2014 Martyn Ratcliffe (Executive Chairman) £275,000 n/a n/a
1. There were no Performance Share Plan awards that vested in relation to the period ended 31 December 2025.
Explanatory notes relating to the prior years’ figures are included in previous Directors’ Remuneration Reports.
Directors’ shareholdings and shareholding requirement (audited)
The interests of those persons who served as Directors during 2025 and their families in the ordinary shares of the Company as at
31 December 2025 (or, if earlier, the date of their retirement from the Board) were as follows:
Ordinary shares at
31 December 2025
Ordinary shares at
31 December 2024
Met Shareholding
Guidelines
Ivan Martin 225,000 225,000 N/A
Sara Dickinson N/A
Alex Curran 11,923 11,923 N/A
1
Paula Dowdy N/A
1. Alex Curran is not required to meet the shareholding guidelines until the end of the three year period follow appointment to the Board.
There have been no changes since 31 December 2025 to the shareholdings of any current Director. None of the Directors had
an interest in the shares of any subsidiary undertaking of the Company or in any significant contracts of the Group. Details of
Directors’ interests in shares and options under Company long-term incentives are set out in the sections below.
Under the Remuneration Policy which was approved by shareholders at the 2023 Annual General Meeting, Executive Directors are
expected to acquire and retain shares with a value equal to 200% of their base salary, by the end of the three-year period following
their appointment to the Board. Directors are not expected to acquire shares in the market in order to meet this guideline but
instead are expected to retain shares acquired through the Group’s share plans. Further information on this shareholding guideline
can be found on page 51.

Graphics
65
Directors’ interests under Company share plans (audited)
The table below shows the interests of each Director who served during 2025 as at 31 December 2025 in the Company’s share
plans.
Director Grant
Shares subject to
award as at 1
January
2025
Granted in
2025
Exercised in
2025
Lapsed in
2025
Shares subject to
awards as at
31 December 2025 Status
Alex Curran Long term incentive plan
2022
1
36,772 (36,772) Original award over
49,029 shares. 25%
EPS element lapsed on
31 December 2024, 75%
TSR element lapsed on
22 November 2025 (see
page 46)
2023
2
121,215 121,215 Unvested, subject to
performance conditions
2024
3
110,739 110,739 Unvested, subject to
performance conditions
2025
4
126,507 126,507 Unvested, subject to
performance conditions
Deferred Bonus Plan
2024 2,033 2,033 Unvested, subject to
performance conditions
2025 4,838 4,838 Unvested, subject to
performance conditions
270,759 131,345 {36,772) 365,332
1. The awards granted in 2022 are subject to a performance condition described on page 72 of the 2022 Annual Report and Accounts.
2. The awards granted in 2023 are subject to a performance condition described on page 52 of the 2023 Annual Report and Accounts.
3. The awards granted in 2024 are subject to performance conditions described on page 50 of the 2024 Annual Report and Accounts.
4. The awards granted in 2025 are subject to performance conditions described on page 59 of this report.
Advisors
In fulfilling its role, the Committee seeks professional advice when considered appropriate to do so. Deloitte LLP is retained
to provide independent advice on executive remuneration to the Committee as required. Independent advisors on executive
remuneration were made available to the Committee during the year. Deloitte LLP’s total fees for the provision of remuneration
services to the Committee in 2025 were £7,900 (2024: £5,600). After careful consideration, the Committee is satisfied that the
advice provided by Deloitte LLP is independent and objective. Deloitte LLP also advises the Group on the operation of its share
plans, associated tax matters and remuneration disclosure matters.
Deloitte LLP is a founder member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and adheres to its Code of Conduct for
consultants to Remuneration Committees of United Kingdom-listed companies, details of which can be found at
www.remunerationconsultantsgroup.com.
Evaluation of the Committee
The Committee’s performance was assessed as part of the internal Board Effectiveness Review. The Committee is regarded as
operating effectively, and the Board takes assurance from the quality of the Committee’s work.

Graphics
Directors’ Remuneration Report
66
Statement of shareholder voting
At the Annual General Meeting of the Company on 14 May 2024, the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the year ended
31 December 2023 was approved by shareholders as follows:
Approval of the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 December 2023
Total number
of votes
% of votes
cast
For (including discretionary) 48,533,502 97.00%
Against 1,500,258 3.00%
Total votes cast (excluding withheld votes) 50,033,760 100.00%
Votes withheld 0
Total votes cast (including withheld votes) 50,033,760
At the Annual General Meeting of the Company on 28 May 2025, the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the year ended
31 December 2024 was approved by shareholders as follows:
Approval of the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 December 2024
Total number
of votes
% of votes
cast
For (including discretionary) 34,509,274 97.69%
Against 816,390 2.31%
Total votes cast (excluding withheld votes) 35,325,664 100.00%
Votes withheld 0
Total votes cast (including withheld votes) 35,325,664
Note: Withheld votes are not included in the final voting figures as they are not recognised as a vote in law.
The Remuneration Report was approved by a duly authorised Committee of the Board of Directors on 7 April 2026 and signed on
its behalf by:
Paula Dowdy
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

Graphics
Directors’ Report
67
For the purposes of the Companies Act 2006, the disclosures below, including those incorporated by reference, together with the
Governance Section of this Annual Report (pages 29 to 71), and the Statement of Directors Responsibilities on page 72 form the
Directors’ Report.
In addition, disclosures relating to the following items, which all form part of the Directors’ report, have been included in the
Strategic report:
Principal risks, pages 24 to 26;
Greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions and energy consumption, pages 16 to 18; and
Employees, pages 14 to 16.
Application of the 2024 UK Corporate Governance Code
Full details of how the Company has applied the principles of the Code throughout the year can be found within the Governance
Section of this Annual Report (pages 29 to 71).
Principal Activity and Business Review
Aptitude Software Group plc is a market-leading provider of software solutions that deliver fully autonomous finance. The Company
and its subsidiaries (see note 12 to the financial statements) together are referred to in this Annual Report as the “Group”. The
Group’s products and services are detailed within the CEO’s report.
An analysis of the Group’s development (including likely future developments) and performance is contained in the Chairman’s
Statement and the CEO’s report.
Directors
Details of Directors who have held office during the year and up to the date of signing these financial statements are given below:
Ivan Martin (Chairman)
Alex Curran
Sara Dickinson
Mike Johns (resigned on 25 March 2025)
Barbara Moorhouse (resigned on 28 May 2025)
Paula Dowdy (appointed 28 May 2025)
Biographical details of the current Directors are set out on pages 29 to 30. The Company’s Articles of Association require
Directors to retire and offer themselves for election and re-election at least every three years, however, in accordance with the
recommendation of the 2024 Corporate Governance Code, all Directors shall retire and offer themselves for election and re-
election at the 2026 Annual General Meeting save for Ivan Martin (see page 3 for further information).
Information on the Directors’ remuneration, share plan participation and service contracts are set out in the Directors’
Remuneration Report on pages 45 to 66.
Directors’ Interests
The Directors’ Interests in the Company are detailed in the directors’ remuneration report on pages 64 and 65.
Results and dividends
The results for the year are set out in the financial statements and notes on pages 81 to 135. The Board is pleased to propose
a final dividend of 3.60 pence per share, making a total of 5.40 pence per share for the year (2024 total: 5.4 pence). Subject to
shareholder approval, the proposed final dividend will be payable to shareholders on the register at 22 May 2026 and will be paid
on 12 June 2026.
Key performance indicators (“KPIs”)
KPIs are set for the Group and can be found within the Key Operational and Financial Highlights on page 2.
Future developments
Details of the Group’s future developments are provided in the Chief Executive Officer’s Report on pages 5 and 7.

Graphics
Directors’ Report
68
Payment of suppliers
The Group does not follow a standard payment practice but agrees with terms and conditions for its business transactions with
each of its suppliers. Payment is then made in accordance with these terms.
Charitable donations
During the year, the Group made charitable donations of £4,083 (2024: £500).
Political donations
The Group made no political donations in the year (2024: £Nil).
Substantial shareholdings
Notifications received by the Company in accordance with the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the Financial Conduct
Authority are published via the UK Regulatory Information Service and on the Company’s website. As at 31 December 2025, the
Company had been advised of the following notifiable interests in its voting rights:
Number of
shares held as at
31 March
2026
*
Number of
shares as at
31 December
2025
2*
Number of
shares as at
31 December
2024
3*
Long Path Partners
8,857,866
(16.24%)
8,868,366
(15.96%)
9,000,695
(16.00%)
Schroders plc
8,450,000
(15.49%)
7,195,000
(12.95%)
8,259,311
(14.69%)
Mission Trail Capital Management LLC 7,168,029
(13.14%)
7,068,029
(12.72%)
4,494,890
(7.99%)
L6 Holdings Inc
4,148,326
(7.60%)
4,148,326
(7.46%)
1,380,000
(2.48%)
Mrs C Barbour, Mr B Barbour & Bank of New York Mellon (Brussels (Pooled)) 2,929,894
(5.37%)
2,929,894
(5.27%)
2,941,694
(5.23%)
Soros Fund Management 2,491,288
(4.57%)
2,491,288
(4.48%)
2,226,710
(3.96%)
Herald Investment Management 2,458,277
(4.51%)
2,458,277
(4.42%)
2,458,277
(4.37%)
Canaccord Genuity Group Inc. 2,150,000
(3.94%)
2,150,000
(3.87%)
5,310,000
(9.45%)
FIL Limited 1,670,682
(3.06%)
1,670,682
(3.01%)
3,267,986
(5.81)
Investo Limited 1,192,386
(2.19%)
1,192,386
(2.15%)
3,900,032
(6.94%)
1 Calculated by reference to the number of voting shares in issue as at 31 March 2026, being 54,551,064.
2 Calculated by reference to the number of voting shares in issue at 31 December 2025, being 55,579,564.
3 Calculated by reference to the number of voting shares in issue at 31 December 2024, being 56,218,298.
* % ISC stated in brackets
Share capital
At 31 March 2026 the Company had a single class of share capital which is divided into ordinary shares of 7 1/3 pence each. Details
of the changes in the Company’s share capital are disclosed in note 23 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Rights and obligations attaching to shares
Voting in meetings of the Company
Voting at a general meeting shall be on a show of hands unless a poll is demanded. On a show of hands, every shareholder present
in person, and every proxy duly appointed by a shareholder shall have one vote. On a poll, every shareholder who is present in
person or by proxy shall have one vote for every share of which he or she is the holder.
No shareholder shall be entitled to vote at any general meeting or class meeting in respect of shares held by him or her if any call
or other sum then payable by him or her in respect of that share remains unpaid. Currently, all issued shares are fully paid.

Graphics
69
Deadlines for voting rights
Full details of the deadlines for exercising voting rights in respect of the resolutions to be considered at the Annual General
Meeting to be held on 27 May 2026 are set out in the Notice of Meeting which accompanies this report.
Dividends and distributions
Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, the Company may, by ordinary resolution, declare a dividend to be paid
to shareholders, but no dividend shall exceed the amount recommended by the Board. The Board may pay interim dividends or
special dividends of such amounts, on such dates and in respect of such periods as the Board thinks fit. If in the opinion of the
Board the profits available for distribution justify such payments, the Board may declare and pay the fixed dividends on any class
of shares carrying a fixed dividend (if any). All dividends shall be apportioned and paid pro-rata according to the amounts paid up
on the shares.
Transfer of shares
Subject to the Articles, any shareholder may transfer all or any of his or her certified shares in writing by an instrument of transfer
in any usual form or in any other form which the Board may approve. The Board may, at its absolute discretion and without giving
any reasons, decline to register any instrument of transfer of a certified share which is not a fully paid share provided that, where
any such shares are admitted to the Official List of the Financial Conduct Authority, such discretion may not be exercised in such
a way as to prevent dealings in the shares of that class from taking place on an open and proper basis. The Board may decline to
recognise any instrument of transfer relating to shares in certificated form unless it is in respect of only one class of share and is
lodged (duly stamped) at the Company’s registered office or such other place as the Board have appointed accompanied by the
relevant share certificate(s) and such other evidence as the Board may reasonably require to show the right of the transferor or to
make the transfer (and, if the instrument of transfer is executed by some other person on his or her behalf, the authority of that
person so to do). In the case of a transfer of shares in certificated form a recognised clearing house or a nominee of a recognised
clearing house or of a recognised investment exchange the lodgement of share certificates will only be necessary if and to the
extent that certificates have been issued in respect of the shares in question. The Directors may also refuse to register an allotment
or transfer of shares (whether fully paid or not) in favour of more than four transferees. Subject to the Articles and the CREST Rules
(as defined in the Uncertificated Securities Regulations, as amended), and apart from any class of wholly dematerialised security,
the Board may permit any class of shares in the Company to be held in uncertificated form and, subject to the Articles, title to
uncertificated shares to be transferred by means of a relevant system.
Employee Share Trust
The Company operates an Employee Benefit Trust (‘EBT’) which is used to purchase Company shares in the market from time to
time and hold them for satisfying awards that vest under the Company’s various share incentive plans. The EBT, at 31 December
2025, holds 1,000,558 ordinary shares in the Company.
Change of control
Under the terms of the Company’s share option schemes, upon a change of control of the Company following a takeover bid, an
option holder shall be entitled to exercise the relevant option within a time period of not more than six months. This would allow
the exercise of awards subject to the discretion of the Remuneration Committee as to whether relevant performance conditions
have been sufficiently satisfied and any pro-rating to be applied. There are a small number of client contracts which include a
change of control clause in relation to the Group.
Amendment to the Articles
Amendments to the Articles may be made in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 by way of a special
resolution in general meeting.
Appointment and replacement of Directors
Unless and until otherwise determined by ordinary resolution of the Company, Directors shall be no less than two (2) and no more
than ten (10) in number. Directors may be appointed by the Company by ordinary resolution or by the Board. The Board complies
with the 2024 Corporate Governance Code (the “Code”) provision on annual re-election of all directors. The appointment and
replacement of directors is governed by the company’s Articles of Association (the “Articles”), the Code, Companies Act 2006 and
other related legislation.
The Board may from time to time appoint one or more Directors to undertake such services for the Company that the Board may
decide and such persons (other than those who hold an executive office or are employees of the Company or any subsidiary) will
be entitled to be paid such fees as the Board will determine for their services to the Company as Directors but will not exceed

Graphics
Directors’ Report
70
in aggregate the sum of £1,000,000 per annum (excluding bonus arrangements and incentive schemes of the Company) or such
greater sum as the Company in general meeting may determine.
Repurchase of own shares update
At the Annual General Meeting held on 28 May 2025 members renewed the authority under section 701 of the Companies Act 2006
to make market purchases on the London Stock Exchange of up to 5,568,138 ordinary shares of 7 1/3 pence each (representing
approximately 10% of the Company’s issued share capital at that time). A resolution to give the Directors further authority for the
Company to purchase its own shares is to be proposed at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting on 27 May 2026.
Details of the current share buyback programme are set out on page 131.
Significant contracts
There did not exist at any time during the year any contract involving the Company or any of its subsidiaries in which a Director
of the Company was or is materially interested or any contract which was either a contract of significance with a controlling
shareholder or a contract for the provision of service by a controlling shareholder. Related party transactions are disclosed on
page 135.
Treasury and foreign exchange
The Group maintains appropriate treasury policies and procedures, approved by the Board, to manage financial risk effectively.
The treasury function manages interest rates on both borrowings and cash and ensures that appropriate facilities are in place to
meet the Group’s strategic plans.
To mitigate and manage exchange rate risk arising from the Group’s Innovation Centre in Poland, the Group routinely enters into
forward contracts to cover monthly transactions with that part of the business. The Group also continues to monitor exchange
rate risk generally in respect of other foreign currency exposures.
To mitigate and manage interest rate risk, the Group maintains an interest rate hedge to manage exposure on borrowings. An
interest rate swap is used as a cash flow hedge of future interest payments, which has the effect of increasing the proportion of
fixed interest debt.
These treasury policies and procedures are regularly monitored and reviewed. It remains the Group’s policy not to undertake
speculative transactions that create exposures beyond those arising from normal trading activity.
See page 97 for further information on the Group’s management of financial risk.
Overseas subsidiaries and branches
Details of the Group’s subsidiaries, including those in overseas jurisdictions, are disclosed in Note 12 to the financial statements.
The Group also currently operates overseas branches in the following countries: Australia, Hong Kong, Ireland, Netherlands,
Singapore and Switzerland.
Section 172 statement
The Section 172 Statement is included in the Strategic Report on pages 11 to 12 and includes details of how the Directors have had
regard for the need to foster good business relationships with its shareholders and other key stakeholders.
Auditors and disclosure of information to auditor
As far as the Directors are aware, there is no relevant audit information (as defined by section 418(3) of the Companies Act 2006)
of which the Company’s auditors are unaware and each of the Directors has taken the steps that they ought to have taken as
Directors in order to make themselves aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditors are
aware of that information.
RSM UK Audit LLP have indicated their willingness to continue as Auditor and their re-appointment has been approved by the
Audit Committee. Resolutions to re-appoint them and to authorise the Audit Committee to determine their remuneration will be
proposed at the 2026 Annual General Meeting.

Graphics
71
Annual General Meeting
The forthcoming Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) will be held at 9.00 a.m. on Wednesday 27 May 2026 at the registered office
of Aptitude Software Group plc, 8th Floor, 138 Cheapside, London EC2V 6BJ. The Notice of the AGM contains the full text of
resolutions to be proposed. Shareholders are welcome to attend the meeting in person, however, we ask that you register your
intention to attend ahead of time so we can monitor numbers in readiness for the meeting.
To enable all shareholders to vote on all resolutions in proportion to their shareholding, voting at the 2026 AGM will be conducted
by way of a poll. Shareholders are strongly encouraged to vote ahead of the meeting regardless of whether they plan to attend
the AGM in person, to mitigate against the risk of disruptions such as train strikes. The Company will release the results of voting,
including proxy votes on each resolution, on its website after the AGM and announce them through a regulatory news service.
Shareholders are also invited to submit questions ahead of the AGM. Details of how you can submit questions and cast your
votes at the AGM are set out in the Notice of Meeting, which will be made available to shareholders by their chosen method of
communication and is also available on our website. Further details can be found in the notice convening the AGM.
By Order of the Board
Simon Kelly
Company Secretary
7 April 2026

Graphics
Statement of Directors’ Responsibility
72
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report, the Directors’ Remuneration Report
and the Financial Statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations.
Company law requires the Directors to prepare group and company financial statements for each financial year. The Directors
are required under company law and under the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority to prepare the Group Financial
Statements in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards. The Directors have elected under company law
to prepare the Company Financial Statements in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards.
The Group and Company Financial Statements are required by law and UK-adopted International Accounting Standards to present
fairly the financial position of the Group and the Company and the financial performance of the Group. The Companies Act 2006
provides in relation to such financial statements that references in the relevant part of that Act to financial statements giving a
true and fair view are references to their achieving a fair presentation.
Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair
view of the state of affairs of the Group and the Company and of the profit or loss of the Group for that period.
In preparing each of the Group and Company financial statements, the Directors are required to:
select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;
make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and prudent;
state whether they have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards; and
prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group and Company
will continue in business.
The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Group and
Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Group and Company and
enable them to ensure that the financial statements and the Directors’ Remuneration Report comply with the Companies Act
2006. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Group and Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for
the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.
Directors’ confirmations
The Directors consider that the Annual Report and financial statements, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable
and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group and Company’s position and performance, business
model and strategy.
Each of the Directors, whose names and functions are listed in the Directors and Advisers section, confirm that, to the best of each
person’s knowledge:
the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit and losses of the Company and the undertakings included in the
consolidation taken as a whole; and
the Directors’ Report contained in the Annual Report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the
business and the position of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with
a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.
The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the
Aptitude Software Group plc website.
Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation
in other jurisdictions.
By Order of the Board on 7 April 2026.
Simon Kelly
Company Secretary

Graphics
Independent Auditors Report
to the members of Aptitude Software Group plc
73
to the members of Aptitude
Software Group plc
Independent Auditor’s Report
Opinion
We have audited the financial statements of Aptitude Software Group plc (the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the
‘group’) for the year ended 31 December 2025 which comprise the Consolidated Income Statement, Consolidated Statement of
Comprehensive Income, Consolidated and Company Balance Sheets, Consolidated Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity,
Company Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity, Consolidated and Company Statements of Cash Flows and notes to
the financial statements, including significant accounting policies. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in
the preparation of the group financial statements is applicable law and UK-adopted International Accounting Standards. The
financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the parent company financial statements is applicable
law and UK-adopted International Accounting Standards and, as regards the parent company financial statements, as applied in
accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.
In our opinion:
the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 31
December 2025 and of the group’s profit for the year then ended;
the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting
Standards;
the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International
Accounting Standards and as applied in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and
the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
section of our report. We are independent of the group and parent company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are
relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest
entities and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. We believe that the audit
evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.
Summary of our audit approach
Key audit matters Group
Revenue recognition
Parent Company
None
Materiality Group
Overall materiality: £404,000 (2024: £436,000)
Performance materiality: £303,000 (2024: £327,000)
Parent Company
Overall materiality: £403,000 (2024: £435,000)
Performance materiality: £302,000 (2024: £326,000)
Scope Our audit procedures covered 100% of revenue, 100% of total assets and 100% of profit before
tax.

Graphics
Independent Auditors Report
to the members of Aptitude Software Group plc
74
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our audit of the group and
parent company financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement
(whether or not due to fraud) we identified, including those which had the greatest effect on the overall audit strategy, the
allocation of resources in the audit and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the
context of our audit of the group and parent company financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and
we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
Revenue recognition
Key audit matter description The group’s key revenue recognition policies are set out on pages 88 to 92 of the financial
statements and the critical accounting judgements and estimates relating to revenue recognition
are set out on page 102.
Software licence, subscription and maintenance revenue
A significant risk has been identified in relation to the involvement of significant management
judgements and estimates in the recognition of licence, subscription and maintenance revenues.
The key judgements and estimates are:
Assessment of licence, subscription and maintenance as a single performance obligation;
Assessment of implementation and solutions management services as separate performance
obligations;
Recognition of revenue over time based on the input of consistent development activity;
and
The revenue constraint applied before the go-live date due to customer-specific
circumstances.
Software implementation and services revenue
A significant risk has been identified in respect of implementation revenues, owing to the
degree to which management estimates impact the revenue recognition and the incentives to
manipulate revenue. This is specifically in relation to the assessment of the stage of completion
as represented by time costs incurred and estimates of costs yet to be incurred. The proportion
of the contract fulfilled drives the right to recognise revenue and therefore estimation of the
time required subsequent to the year end to deliver and complete the services to customer
expectations is critical to revenue recognition.

Graphics
75
How the matter was
addressed in the audit
Our audit work included but was not restricted to:
Obtaining an understanding of the processes and controls around revenue recognition;
Reviewing the group’s revenue recognition policy, including supporting accounting papers, to
assess whether performance obligations have been appropriately identified and recognised
in line with IFRS 15;
Challenging and assessing key management judgements that impact the recognition of
revenue in the period; and
Auditing the disclosures in the financial statements and evaluating whether the policy for
revenue recognition is appropriately explained and critical judgements and key sources of
estimation uncertainty are appropriately disclosed.
Specifically for software licence, subscription and maintenance revenue, our audit work included
but was not restricted to:
Auditing the IFRS 15 revenue calculations, including confirming the methodology applied is
in line with the group’s revenue recognition policy;
Agreeing inputs to the IFRS 15 calculations to signed customer contracts, recalculating the
expected revenue based on management’s IFRS 15 judgements and estimates and comparing
to the actual revenue recognised;
Verifying the assessment of continuous development activity through the input method
using staff allocation data and forecasts to review the level of development across the year;
Holding discussions with project managers regarding the key assumptions and judgements
regarding continuous development activity and the pre “go-live” risks related to the
constraints model;
Reviewing any contract cancellations to assess the appropriateness of limiting revenue
recognised to invoiced amounts pre “go-live” date and testing the application of the revenue
recognition constraints to contracts in the period; and
Performing completeness checks by reviewing a list of approved contracts from the contracts
sales and management system and checking revenue has been recognised for all active
contracts in the year, in line with the revenue recognition policy.
Specifically for software implementation and services revenue, our audit work included but was
not restricted to:
Testing the controls over the approval of timesheet reports and approval of invoices
(including agreement to customer-signed Statement of Works where appropriate) prior to
billing;
Verifying revenue recognised in the period to Statement of Works, supporting agreements,
sales invoices and employee timesheet data where applicable;
Testing the completeness and accuracy of timesheet and budget data which drives invoicing;
Testing the completeness and accuracy of revenue deferred based on management’s
estimate of additional effort required to satisfy certain contractual obligations without
incremental charge, and challenging management’s estimates on specific projects; and
Completing targeted testing procedures for revenue recognised around the reporting date
through review of timesheet data reconciled to customer invoices and accrued revenue
adjustments.
Key observations Details of the key judgements and estimates applied in respect of revenue recognition are
disclosed in “Critical accounting estimates and judgements” section of the Accounting Policies
included in the financial statements. Based on the results of the audit procedures outlined above,
we have no key observations to report.

Graphics
Independent Auditors Report
to the members of Aptitude Software Group plc
76
Our application of materiality
When establishing our overall audit strategy, we set certain thresholds which help us to determine the nature, timing and extent
of our audit procedures. When evaluating whether the effects of misstatements, both individually and on the financial statements
as a whole, could reasonably influence the economic decisions of the users we take into account the qualitative nature and the
size of the misstatements. Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality as follows:
Group Parent company
Overall materiality £404,000 (2024: £436,000) £403,000 (2024: £435,000)
Basis for determining
overall materiality
4.8% of operating profit adjusted to exclude
the amortisation charged in the year to align
with the adjusted operating profit highlighted
by management to users of the financial
statements.
1% of net assets, capped at group materiality.
Rationale for benchmark
applied
As a listed entity, a profit-driven figure is
considered the most appropriate benchmark
for users of the financial statements.
Net assets is considered to be the most
appropriate benchmark for the parent
company as it is primarily a holding company.
Performance materiality £303,000 (2024: £327,000) £302,000 (2024: £326,000)
Basis for determining
performance materiality
75% of overall materiality 75% of overall materiality
Reporting of misstatements
to the Audit Committee
Misstatements in excess of £20,200 and
misstatements below that threshold that, in
our view, warranted reporting on qualitative
grounds.
Misstatements in excess of £20,100 and
misstatements below that threshold that, in
our view, warranted reporting on qualitative
grounds.
An overview of the scope of our audit
The group consists of 8 legal entities, located in the following countries:
United Kingdom
United States
Poland
Canada
Singapore
Although the structure of the group is made up of a number of legal entities, we have assessed that the group is a single component
for the purposes of our audit because financial information is presented to management and the Board on a consolidated basis
and the group’s financial statements report a single segment and do not disclose any specific divisional information. The group’s
principal activity is consistent across all locations with a commonality of operations and there is operational interdependence
across the group.
Full scope audit procedures were applied to the group as a whole and therefore our audit approach covers 100% of profit before
tax, revenue and total assets. All audit work was completed by the group audit team and no component auditors were used in
our audit.

Graphics
77
Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the
preparation of the financial statements is appropriate. Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group’s and parent
company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included:
Checking the arithmetic accuracy of the forecasts that form the basis of the Directors’ going concern assessment and viability
statement;
Assessing the appropriateness of the period used for the viability statement;
Corroborating the cash balances used as the starting point for the forecasts by confirming to bank confirmations;
Challenging management’s forecasts and comparing the 2026 budget to YTD results and order book;
Assessing covenant compliance within the period and agreeing that management forecasts and viability statement data is
compliant with covenant requirements;
Assessing the assumptions made in management’s stress-testing and reviewing contingency planning;
Completing further sensitivity analysis and stress-testing; and
Auditing the disclosures in the financial statements in respect of going concern and viability.
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that,
individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the group’s or the parent company’s ability to continue as a going
concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial statements are authorised for issue.
In relation to the entity reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing material to add
or draw attention to in relation to the directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether the directors considered it
appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections
of this report.
Other information
The other information comprises the information included in the annual report other than the financial statements and our
auditor’s report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report. Our opinion
on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our
report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.
Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent
with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.
If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives
rise to a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude
that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.
We have nothing to report in this regard.
Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion, the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the
Companies Act 2006.
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:
the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial statements
are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and
the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

Graphics
Independent Auditors Report
to the members of Aptitude Software Group plc
78
Matters on which we are required to report by exception
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and the parent company and their environment obtained in the
course of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the Strategic Report or the Directors’ Report.
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report
to you if, in our opinion:
adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been
received from branches not visited by us; or
the parent company financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited are not in
agreement with the accounting records and returns; or
certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.
Corporate governance statement
We have reviewed the directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of the Corporate
Governance Statement relating to the parent company’s compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code
specified for our review by the Listing Rules.
Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the Corporate
Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge obtained during the audit:
Directors’ statement with regards the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of accounting and any material
uncertainties identified set out on pages 27 to 28;
Directors’ explanation as to their assessment of the group’s prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the period
is appropriate set out on page 27;
Director’s statement on whether it has a reasonable expectation that the group will be able to continue in operation and
meets its liabilities set out on page 28;
Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 44;
Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks set out on pages 24 to 26;
Section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems set
out on pages 40 and 41; and,
Section describing the work of the audit committee set out on pages 39 to 44.
Responsibilities of directors
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement set out on page 72, the directors are responsible for the
preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as
the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement,
whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the parent company’s ability
to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of
accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group or the parent company or to cease operations, or have no
realistic alternative but to do so.
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a
high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the
aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial
statements.


Graphics
79
The extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including
fraud
Irregularities are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. The objectives of our audit are to obtain sufficient
appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance with laws and regulations that have a direct effect on the determination of
material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, to perform audit procedures to help identify instances of non-
compliance with other laws and regulations that may have a material effect on the financial statements, and to respond
appropriately to identified or suspected non-compliance with laws and regulations identified during the audit.
In relation to fraud, the objectives of our audit are to identify and assess the risk of material misstatement of the financial
statements due to fraud, to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the assessed risks of material misstatement
due to fraud through designing and implementing appropriate responses and to respond appropriately to fraud or suspected
fraud identified during the audit.
However, it is the primary responsibility of management, with the oversight of those charged with governance, to ensure that the
entity's operations are conducted in accordance with the provisions of laws and regulations and for the prevention and detection
of fraud.
In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud, the group audit engagement
team:
obtained an understanding of the nature of the industry and sector, including the legal and regulatory frameworks that the
group and parent company operate in and how the group and parent company are complying with the legal and regulatory
frameworks;
inquired of management, and those charged with governance, about their own identification and assessment of the risks of
irregularities, including any known actual, suspected or alleged instances of fraud;
discussed matters about non-compliance with laws and regulations and how fraud might occur including assessment of how
and where the financial statements may be susceptible to fraud.
The most significant laws and regulations were determined as follows:
Legislation /
Regulation
Additional audit procedures performed by the Group audit
engagement team included:
UK-adopted IAS and
Companies Act 2006
Review of the financial statement disclosures and testing to supporting documentation.
Completion of disclosure checklists to identify areas of non-compliance.
Tax compliance
regulations
Inspection of advice received from internal / external tax advisors.
Consultation with a tax specialist regarding the approach taken to the audit of tax.
Consideration of whether any matter identified during the audit required reporting to an
appropriate authority outside the entity.

Graphics
Independent Auditors Report
to the members of Aptitude Software Group plc
80
The areas that we identified as being susceptible to material misstatement due to fraud were:
Risk Audit procedures performed by the audit engagement team:
Revenue recognition The audit procedures performed in relation to revenue recognition are documented in the
key audit matters section of our audit report.
Management override of
controls
Testing the appropriateness of journal entries and other adjustments;
Assessing whether the judgements made in making accounting estimates are indicative of a
potential bias; and
Evaluating the business rationale of any significant transactions that are unusual or outside
the normal course of business.
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the Financial Reporting Council’s
website at: http://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report.
Other matters which we are required to address
Following the recommendation of the audit committee, we were appointed by management in September 2021 to audit the
financial statements for the year ending 31 December 2021 and subsequent financial periods.
The period of total uninterrupted consecutive appointments is 5 years, covering the years ending 31 December 2021 to 31
December 2025.
The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the group or the parent company and we
remain independent of the group and the parent company in conducting our audit.
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the audit committee in accordance with ISAs (UK).
Use of our report
This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act
2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are required to
state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume
responsibility to anyone other than the company and the company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for
the opinions we have formed.
In due course, as required by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules, these financial
statements will form part of the Annual Financial Report prepared in Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) format and
filed on the National Storage Mechanism of the UK FCA. This auditor’s report provides no assurance over whether the annual
financial report has been prepared in XHTML format.
GRAHAM RICKETTS (Senior Statutory Auditor)
For and on behalf of RSM UK Audit LLP, Statutory Auditor
Chartered Accountants
25 Farringdon Street
London
EC4A 4AB
Date: 7 April 2026

Graphics
81
Consolidated Income Statement
for the year ended 31 December 2025
Year ended 31 Dec 2025 Year ended 31 Dec 2024
Note
Before non-
underlying
items
£000
Non-
underlying
items
£000
Total
£000
Before non-
underlying
items
£000
Non-
underlying
items
£000
Total
£000
Revenue 1, 2 64,954 64,954 70,044 70,044
Operating costs
3 (54,922) (5,226) (60,148) (60,126) (4,243) (64,369)
Operating profit
10,032 (5,226) 4,806 9,918 (4,243) 5,675
Finance income
5 146 146 368 368
Finance costs
5 (312) (312) (450) (450)
Net finance costs
(166) (166) (82) (82)
Profit before income tax
9,866 (5,226) 4,640 9,836 (4,243) 5,593
Income tax (expense)/credit
6 (1,948) 1,332 (616) (1,484) 871 (613)
Profit for the year from continuing
operations
7,918 (3,894) 4,024 8,352 (3,372) 4,980
Earnings per share
Basic 7
7.3p 8.8p
Diluted 7
7.1p 8.6p
The accounting policies and notes on pages 87 to 135 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.


Graphics
Consolidated Statement of
Comprehensive Income
for the year ended 31 December 2025
82
Note
Group
Year ended
31 Dec
2025
£000
Group
Year ended
31 Dec
2024
£000
Profit for the year
4,024 4,980
Other comprehensive income
Items that will or may be reclassified to profit or loss:
Cash flow hedges reclassified to income statement
25 (847) (713)
Gain/(loss) on effective cash flow hedges
25 830 (254)
Deferred tax on cash flow hedges
15 (70) 242
Currency translation difference
(197) (247)
Other comprehensive expense for the year, net of tax
(284) (972)
Total comprehensive income for the year
3,740 4,008
The accounting policies and notes on pages 87 to 135 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.


Graphics
83
Balance Sheets
At 31 December 2025
Note
Group
As at 31 Dec
2025
£000
Group
As at 31 Dec
2024
£000
Company
As at 31 Dec
2025
£000
Company
As at 31 Dec
2024
£000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment including right-of-use assets
9 3,575 4,016 41 13
Goodwill 10 46,006 46,006
Intangible assets 11 11,965 15,412
Investments in subsidiaries 12 69,798 69,419
Other long-term assets 13 530 730
Deferred tax assets
15 852 1,250
62,928 67,414 69,839 69,432
Current assets
Trade and other receivables 16 11,140 14,861 35,321 15,900
Financial assets – derivative financial instruments
17 272 387 103 368
Current income tax assets 14 2,486 1,721 500
Cash and cash equivalents 18 29,558 30,400 6,722 17,822
43,456 47,369 42,146 34,590
Total assets
106,384 114,783 111,985 104,022
LIABILITIES
Current liabilities
Financial liabilities
borrowings 19 (1,250) (7,180) (1,250) (7,180)
derivative financial instruments 17 (214)
Trade and other payables 20 (9,735) (8,397) (35,276) (18,943)
Contract liabilities / deferred revenue 20 (a) (28,227) (32,225)
Capital lease obligations 21 (543) (527)
Current income tax liabilities (3,064) (1,802) (210)
Provisions 22 (25)
(42,819) (50,370) (36,736) (26,123)
Net current (liabilities)/assets 637 (3,001) 5,410 8,467
Non-current liabilities
Financial liabilities borrowings 19 (4,690) (4,690)
Capital lease obligations 21 (1,854) (2,416)
Provisions 22 (377) (358)
Deferred tax liabilities 15 (2,432) (3,722) (108) (45)
(9,353) (6,496) (4,798) (45)
NET ASSETS 54,212 57,917 70,451 77,854
SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Share capital 23 4,115 4,204 4,115 4,204
Share premium account 24 11,959 11,959 11,959 11,959
Capital redemption reserve 12,461 12,372 12,461 12,372
Other reserves 25 30,951 34,325 13,949 17,644
Treasury shares reserve 26 (1,613) (3,812) (1,613) (3,812)
(Accumulated losses)/retained earnings 27 (2,356) (23) 29,580 35,487
Foreign currency translation reserve (1,305) (1,108)
TOTAL EQUITY
54,212 57,917 70,451 77,854
The accounting policies and notes on pages 87 to 135 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.
In addition, under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 the Company is exempt from the requirement to present its own
income statement. The profit for the year of the Company was £0.7 million (2024: profit for the year £14.5 million), see note 27
for details.
The financial statements on pages 81 to 135 were authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 7 April 2026 and were signed
on its behalf by:
Ivan Martin Alex Curran
Director Director Company Registered Number: 01602662


Graphics
Consolidated Statement of Changes in
Shareholders’ Equity
for the year ended 31 December 2025
84
Attributable to owners of the Parent
Note
Share
capital
£000
Share
premium
account
£000
(Accumulated
losses)/
retained
earnings
£000
Foreign
currency
translation
reserve
£000
Capital
redemption
reserve
£000
Other
reserves
£000
Treasury
shares
reserves
£000
Total
equity
£000
Group
Balance at 1 January 2024 4,204 11,959 (2,349) (861) 12,372 34,989 60,314
Profit for the year 27 4,980 4,980
Cash flow hedges reclassified to
income statement 25 (713) (713)
Loss on effective cash flow hedges 25 (254) (254)
Deferred tax on cash flow hedges 25 242 242
Exchange rate adjustments (247) (247)
Total comprehensive income for
the year 4,980 (247) (725) 4,008
Share options – value of
employee service 27 611 611
Transfer on exercise of options 25-27 (287) 85 202
Purchase of own shares 25, 26 (24) (4,014) (4,038)
Deferred tax on share options 15 103 103
Dividends to equity holders of the
company 8 (3,081) (3,081)
Transactions with owners (2,654) 61 (3,812) (6,405)
Balance at 31 December 2024 4,204 11,959 (23) (1,108) 12,372 34,325 (3,812) 57,917
Profit for the year 27 4,024 4,024
Cash flow hedges reclassified to
income statement 25 (847) (847)
Gain on effective cash flow hedges 25 830 830
Deferred tax on cash flow hedges 25 (70) (70)
Exchange rate adjustments (197) (197)
Total comprehensive income for the
year 4,024 (197) (87) 3,740
Share options – value of employee
service 27 379 379
Transfer on exercise of options 25-27 (10) 1 9
Purchase of own shares 25, 26 (5,051) (5,051)
Deferred tax on share options 15 226 226
Dividends to equity holders of the
company 8 (2,999) (2,999)
Transactions with owners (2,404) 1 (5,042) (7,445)
Transfers from EBT
25-27 (3,288) 3,288
Cancellation of shares 23, 26 (89) (3,953) 89 3,953
Balance at 31 December 2025 4,115 11,959 (2,356) (1,305) 12,461 30,951 (1,613) 54,212
The accounting policies and notes on pages 87 to 135 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

Graphics
Company Statement of Changes in
Shareholders’ Equity
for the year ended 31 December 2025
85
Attributable to the owners of the Company
Note
Share
capital
£000
Share
premium
account
£000
(Accumulated
losses)/
retained
earnings
£000
Capital
redemption
reserve
£000
Other
reserves
£000
Treasury
shares
reserves
£000
Total
equity
£000
Company
Balance at 1 January 2024
4,204 11,959 23,768 12,372 17,707 70,010
Profit for the year
27 14,476 14,476
Cash flow hedges reclassified to income statement
25 (297) (297)
Gain on effective cash flow hedges
25 131 131
Deferred tax on cash flow hedges
25 42 42
Total comprehensive income for
the year
14,476 (124) 14,352
Share options – value of
employee service
27 611 611
Transfer on exercise of options
25-27 (287) 85 202
Purchase of own shares
25, 26 (24) (4,014) (4,038)
Dividends to equity holders of the company
8 (3,081) (3,081)
Transactions with owners
(2,757) 61 (3,812) (6,508)
Balance at 31 December 2024
4,204 11,959 35,487 12,372 17,644 (3,812) 77,854
Profit for the year
27 687 687
Cash flow hedges reclassified to income statement
25 (379) (379)
Deferred tax on cash flow hedges
25
(29)
(29)
Other movements
(11) (11)
Total comprehensive income for the
year
676 (408) 268
Share options – value of employee
service
27 379 379
Transfer on exercise of options
25-27 (10) 1 9
Purchase of own shares
25, 26 (5,051) (5,051)
Dividends to equity holders of the company
8 (2,999) (2,999)
Transactions with owners
(2,630) 1 (5,042) (7,671)
Transfers from EBT
(3,288) 3,288
Cancellation of shares
23, 26 (89) (3,953) 89 3,953
Balance at 31 December 2025
4,115 11,959 29,580 12,461 13,949 (1,613) 70,451
The accounting policies and notes on pages 87 to 135 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.


Graphics
86
Statements of Cash Flow
for the year ended 31 December 2025
Note
Group
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Company
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Company
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash generated from operations 28 10,895 8,852 1,148 14,324
Interest paid (135) (226) (135) (226)
Income tax paid (680) (1,854)
Net cash flows generated from operating activities 10,080 6,772 1,013 14,098
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment, excluding right-of-use assets 9 (736) (481) (39)
Interest received 5 146 368 146 357
Purchase of intangible assets 11 (1,120)
Net cash (used in)/generated from investing activities (590) (1,233) 107 357
Cash flows from financing activities
Dividends paid to company’s shareholders 8 (2,999) (3,081) (2,999) (3,081)
Purchase of own shares 25, 26 (5,051) (4,058) (5,051) (4,058)
Proceeds from new borrowing 19 5,940 5,940
Repayments of loan 19 (7,128) (1,250) (7,128) (1,250)
Repayment of capital lease obligations 21 (625) (592)
Receipts from group undertakings 20 51,538 54,948
Advances to group undertakings 20 (54,520) (66,143)
Net cash used in financing activities (9,863) (8,981) (12,220) (19,584)
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents (373) (3,442) (11,100) (5,129)
Cash, cash equivalents and bank overdrafts at beginning of year 18 30,400 34,085 17,822 22,951
Exchange rate losses on cash and cash equivalents (469) (243)
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 18 29,558 30,400 6,722 17,822
Borrowings
£000
Leases
£000
Subtotal
£000
Cash
£000
Total
£000
Net funds as at 1 January 2025 (7,180) (2,943) (10,123) 30,400 20,277
Cash flows 1,651 625 2,276 (373) 1,903
Foreign exchange adjustments 32 32 (469) (437)
Unamortised prepaid facility arrangement fees 52 52 52
Interest expense (463) (111) (574) (574)
Net funds as at 31 December 2025 (5,940) (2,397) (8,337) 29,558 21,221
Cash equivalents are short-term, highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and that are
subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.
The accounting policies and notes on pages 87 to 135 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.


Graphics
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
87





ACCOUNTING POLICIES

General information
The Company is a public company limited by shares and incorporated and domiciled in England and Wales.
The Group consolidated financial statements were authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 7 April 2026.


Summary of significant accounting policies
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of these consolidated financial statements are set out below. These
policies have been consistently applied to all the years presented, unless otherwise stated.

Basis of preparation
The consolidated and parent financial statements of Aptitude Software Group plc have been prepared in accordance with UK-
adopted International Accounting Standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and the disclosure
guidance and transparency rules sourcebook of the United Kingdom’s Financial Conduct Authority. The consolidated and parent
financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost basis, as modified by the revaluation of financial assets and
financial liabilities (including derivatives) which are recognised at fair value.
The presentation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also
requires management to exercise its judgement in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The areas involving
a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or where assumptions and estimates are significant to the consolidated and parent
financial statements are disclosed on pages 102 to 104.
Amounts presented have been disclosed to the nearest £’000 unless otherwise stated.


Going Concern
After reviewing the Group’s forecasts and projections, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate
resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. The Directors have prepared forecasts for going concern
which show that the Group will have sufficient cash to operate and meet their operating liabilities as and when they fall due for a
period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of these financial statements. The Group therefore continues to adopt the
going concern basis in preparing its financial statements. Information used to make this decision is detailed below.
A scenario testing exercise was performed for the period covered by the going concern forecast, including considering
management’s base case forecast and an extreme downside scenario where no new customers were won, which is far more
pessimistic than current situations may suggest. In all scenarios Aptitude remains comfortably profitable and cash generative in
the years under review. Financial performance in 2026 is not expected to be materially different from current year levels due to the
long-range revenue visibility achieved through the recurring revenue business model. These recurring revenues, representing over
83% of total revenue, are resilient given the nature of the Group’s enterprise applications which are typically heavily integrated
and central to clients’ mission-critical long-term financial reporting and subscription management processes, underpinned by
minimum contractual terms of up to six years at inception.
The Directors are reassured that the Group is financially robust benefitting from a cash balance at 31 December 2025 of £29.6 million
and net funds of £21.2 million. Additionally, the Group is cash generative and profitable, reporting Adjusted Operating Profit in the
year of £10.0 million. See page 1 for definitions of how these metrics are calculated.
Supplementing these strengths, Aptitude benefits from a diverse client base, across multiple geographies and industries.
The business benefits from a recurring revenue model in which software licence and subscription fees are typically received
annually in advance.


Changes in Accounting policy and disclosures
(a) New standards, interpretations and amendments effective from 1 January 2025
The Group has applied the following new standards, amendments and interpretations for the first time for their annual
reporting period commencing 1 January 2025:
Amendments to IAS 21 Lack of Exchangeability
The adoption of these standards did not have a material impact on the Group’s consolidated financial statements.




Graphics
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
88




(b) New standards and interpretations that have not been early adopted
The following standard has been issued but is not yet effective and has not been early adopted by the Group:
IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements (effective for accounting periods beginning on or after
1 January 2027)
IFRS 18 will replace IAS 1 and introduce new requirements for the presentation of the statement of profit or loss, including
defined subtotals and enhanced disclosure requirements for management-defined performance measures.
The Group is currently assessing the impact of IFRS 18. While it is not expected to affect the recognition or measurement
of items in the financial statements, it is expected to result in changes to the presentation and disclosure of the Group’s
financial performance.
No other standards, amendments or interpretations issued but not yet effective are expected to have a material impact on
the Group’s consolidated financial statements.



Basis of consolidation
The financial statements of the Group comprise the financial statements of the Company, Aptitude Software Group plc and its
subsidiary undertakings (“subsidiaries”) prepared at the consolidated statement of financial position date.
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group has control over an entity where the Group is exposed to, or has
rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and it has the power over the entity to effect those returns. The
existence and effect of potential voting rights that are currently exercisable or convertible are considered when assessing control.
The Group also assesses existence of control where it does not have more than 50% of the voting power but is able to govern
the financial and operating policies by virtue of de-facto control. De-facto control may arise in circumstances where the size
and dispersion of holdings of other shareholders give the Group the power to govern the financial and operating activities. The
results of subsidiaries are consolidated from the date on which control passes to the Group. Results of disposed subsidiaries are
consolidated up to the date on which control passes from the Group.
The purchase method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries by the Group. The cost of an acquisition
is measured as the fair value of the assets given, equity instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of
exchange Identifiable assets and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at
their fair values at acquisition date, irrespective of the extent of any minority interest. The excess of cost of acquisition over the
fair value of the Group’s share of the identifiable net assets is recorded as goodwill.
Inter-company transactions, balances, income and expenses on transactions between group companies are eliminated. Profits
and losses resulting from inter-company transactions that are recognised in assets are also eliminated. Accounting policies of the
subsidiaries have been changed where necessary to ensure consistency with the policies adopted by the Group.



Revenue recognition
Revenue comprises the transaction price, being the amount of consideration the Group expects to be entitled to in exchange for
transferring promised goods or services to a customer in the ordinary course of the Group’s activities. Revenue is shown net of
value-added tax, returns, rebates and discounts and after eliminating sales within the Group.
The Group derives its revenues from the following categories:
software based activity relating to the Group’s intellectual property (comprising software licences, maintenance, support,
software subscription fees, financial transactions, usage fees along with funded development and related consultancy);
and
general consultancy services.

The Group recognises revenue from each of these categories as follows:
Software based activity
Software licence, software subscription and maintenance fees
The Group licences its software on an Annual Licence Fee, Initial Licence Fee or Perpetual Licence Fee basis. The Group also has
a number of Software-as-a-Service offerings with software subscription fees being recognised in the same manner as Annual
Licence Fees.



Graphics
89
Within the policy, the Group references three distinct periods which drives the method by which these revenues are recognised,
being the initial contractual term, the auto-renewal period and the optimisation period. These periods and the relationship
between them is outlined below:
Initial contractual term – The period over which the transaction price for each contract is recognised.
Auto renewal period On conclusion of the initial contractual term, customers enter into auto renewal periods which
are typically twelve months in length. Under the terms of the contract the customer has no material right to enter into
these renewal periods which consequently have been determined as representing a new contract under IFRS 15.
Optimisation period The period assessed by management on inception of the contract over which the revenues are
recognised, representing the duration of time during which the most significant optimisation and functional enhancement
of the software is undertaken. Where this period is greater in length than the initial term of the contract, the revenues
recognised across the contractual term are capped at the total value of the contract.
Assessment of performance obligations
On inception of each contract, the Group assesses whether ongoing contractual obligations, charged as software maintenance,
represent a separately distinct performance obligation and promise from either the licence or subscription fees. If not distinct, the
software licence and maintenance fees form part of a combined performance obligation. If the licence/subscription is distinct it is
recognised separately from the other performance obligations at the time of the delivery of the licenced software.
In assessing whether a licence is distinct from the software maintenance, the Group considers the scope of maintenance services
being provided which extends to the significant continuing requirement to:
optimise functionality within the software;
optimise performance of the software; and
provide technical and functional enhancements to ensure continued user regulatory compliance.
For all existing contracts, it is determined that the software licence/subscription and maintenance fees form part of a combined
performance obligation. The transaction price agreed in the licence and maintenance contract is therefore allocated in full to this
combined performance obligation with the selling price determined by way of the fixed annual licence or subscription fees paid
annually in advance.
How the combined performance obligation is recognized
Where the software licence, subscription and maintenance fees meet the criteria of a combined performance obligation, the
Group determines for each contract the most appropriate method of recognising revenue. This assessment was completed with
reference to paragraph 35 of IFRS 15, in which it was determined that the criteria within Paragraph 35(a) had been met in respect
of recognising the combined performance obligation over time. This is through the customer simultaneously receiving the benefit
of accessing and utilising the software from inception of the contract across the period due to the need for the software to adapt
over time to the changing needs of the client and complexities of the regulatory environment.
Method of revenue recognition in respect of the performance obligations
In determining the most accurate measure of recognising revenue, the business concluded that this should be done in line with
the development activity related to the relevant product. This development activity incorporates the effort incurred in optimising
both the functionality and performance of the software whilst providing technical and functional enhancements.
Measurement of the development activity is completed by way of the input method, with management providing an initial estimate
of the overall expected development hours to be incurred across the contract period. This estimate is then reviewed against actual
hours incurred at the end of each reporting period. Once the Group concludes on the revenue recognition profile, the business
determines on a contract by contract basis the period over which the revenues are recognised. This period is defined as the
optimisation period and represents the duration of time assessed by management during which the most significant optimisation
and functional enhancement of the software is undertaken.
For both periods presented, all contracts assessed were considered to have a consistent development activity based on
management’s assessment of the overall development hours expected to be incurred across the optimisation period. This
assessment was supported by the review against actual hours incurred at the end of each reporting period.



Graphics
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
90
Revenue recognition constraint
Given the highly specialised nature of the software and demands of the customer, the implementation of this software (provided
through a separate statement of work) is complex and frequently involves multi-phase roll outs which identify new requirements
over an extended period of time. Consequently, the period prior to the successful integration of the Group’s application with
the customer’s system (or Go-Live date), provides enhanced levels of contractual risk for the Group in respect of the licence and
maintenance agreement. Under the terms of the contract, both parties have enforceable rights and obligations to terminate over
the length of the agreement to the extent that the implementation of the software is not feasible.
Consequently, during the period from the Group initially licencing its software to the product being deployed into a live client
environment, an ongoing assessment is performed by management on a contract by contract basis to determine if sufficient
challenges exist that would cast doubt over future economic benefits being realised by the business. Where such challenges exist,
the revenue recognised across the period is constrained to the value of any amount invoiced and paid prior to the end of the
reporting date, with this being assessed as the consideration during the period up to deployment. Once the software is deployed,
the amount of revenue recognised is adjusted so that it is proportional to the Group’s development effort to date against the total
expected development hours to be incurred across the contract period.
Revenue recognition where the optimisation period is longer than initial term of the contract
Where the optimisation period for a client is assessed by management as being greater than the initial term of the contract, being
the minimum term of the signed contract before auto renewal, the revenues recognised across the initial term are equal to the
total value of the contract.
Entry into auto-renewal periods during the optimisation period
Where a client’s initial contract term is shorter than the optimisation period assessed by management, the client will enter auto
renewal periods. Per IFRS 15, the Group has concluded that the entry into each auto renewal period represents a new contract due
to the customer having no material right under the terms of the contract to enter into these renewal periods.
Consequently, an assessment of whether the licence and maintenance services still represent a combined performance obligation
is performed.
In assessing whether a licence is distinct from the software maintenance, the Group determined that the scope of maintenance
services being provided aligns with the assessment made on inception of the contract and therefore all existing contracts continue
to form part of a combined performance obligation.
On completion of this assessment, the Group has determined that the development activity should continue to be utilised as the
most appropriate method of recognising revenue across the auto-renewal period.
Entry into auto-renewal periods post optimisation period
The transfer of the combined performance obligation is considered complete once the optimisation period concludes at which
point all clients have entered their auto renewal period. Per IFRS 15, the Group has concluded that the entry into each auto
renewal period represents a new contract under which an assessment of whether the licence and maintenance services still
represent a combined performance obligation is performed. This conclusion was underpinned by the customer having no material
right under the terms of the contract to enter into these renewal periods.
In assessing whether the licence is distinct from the software maintenance, the Group considers the following:
the level of interrelation between the software licence and services provided;
the continuing requirements of the client to receive highly functioning, serviced software; and
the contractual terms and conditions set out in the annual renewal period and whether they are consistent with the
initial term
For both the current and prior year, the Group has determined that the licence and maintenance services for all existing contracts
entering their auto renewal period post optimisation period still represent a combined performance obligation.
On completion of this assessment, the Group determines for each contract the most appropriate revenue recognition method and
has concluded that the development activity related to the relevant product should continue to be utilised.
The annual licence and subscription fee is then recognised across the auto renewal period based on the application of this method.
In all current cases, the development activity is determined to be consistent across the auto-renewal period in accordance with
paragraph B18 of IFRS 15.



Graphics
91



Product specific consultancy (implementation services)
Consultancy services which relate to a project which includes the Group’s software is contracted for on either a time and materials
basis or fixed priced basis and represents a distinct performance obligation from the software licence, software subscription and
maintenance fees. Time and materials consultancy is recognised in the period it is performed in. Fixed price or shared risk work
is recognised on a percentage completion basis of the remaining unbilled milestones. The percentage completed is determined
with reference to effort incurred to date and effort required to complete the development or consultancy. This method, used to
calculate revenue recognition, is appropriate on the basis that the services are transferred to the customer as the development
or consultancy work occurs.
For any contract involving a client licencing one of the Group’s products, an assessment is made by management at the year-end
of the expected amount of any additional consultancy effort to be provided to satisfy certain contractual obligations without
incremental charge. Where such effort is anticipated, an accompanying deferral is calculated based on the value of this time if
charged to the client and is recognised through the deferral of revenues.
Financial transactions and usage fees
Financial transactions and usage fees are billed to clients utilising the e-Suite software on a monthly basis based on a per transaction
fee. The volume of transactions generated each month is driven wholly by the client, with no minimum commitment fee in place.
Revenue generated from financial transaction and usage contracts is therefore recognised in the month they arise.
Assure (previously Solution management services)
Assure goes beyond the Group’s software maintenance services to include services typically performed by the clients’ own IT
teams, including for example, the monitoring of system performance, user administration and release management. The client
will commit to a monthly, quarterly or annual fee that covers an agreed level of services. Revenue from Assure is recognised on a
straight-line basis over the period of the services being provided.
Support fees
Support fees are billed to clients where the Group’s software is licensed by a client and that client contracts with the Group for
support relating to the solution. The client will commit to a minimum monthly, quarterly or annual fee that covers an agreed level
of support and then agrees additional fees for support used over and above the minimum commitment. Revenue from support
contracts are recognised as the fees are earned.
Funded development
Where customers wish to accelerate the product development, the Group undertakes funded development work. Revenue for
funded development work is recognised on a percentage completed basis after deferring a proportion of the revenue to cover
the resolution of any issues arising after the enhancement has been delivered to the customer. The percentage completed is
determined with reference to effort required to complete the development. Once the enhancement has been accepted by the
customer the deferred portion of the revenue is recognised.

Commissions
Software sales commission costs meet the definition under IFRS 15 of incremental costs of obtaining a contract. As a result, an
asset is recognised at inception of the contract for the total value of commissions payable which will typically be amortised across
the optimisation period, this being the period assessed by management over which significant modification and optimisation is
required in respect of each client.

Segmental reporting
Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to key decision makers. These
decision makers are responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments. The primary
segmental reporting is by operating segment, the Group operates only one segment, this being the Aptitude business. The chief
operational decision maker for the segment is Alex Curran (Chief Executive Officer).

Non-underlying items
Non-underlying items are significant items of income or expense which are disclosed and described separately in the accounts
where it is necessary to do so in order to provide a better understanding of the financial performance of the Group. These
items include the costs of acquiring a Group subsidiary, post-acquisition and group restructuring costs, and the amortisation of
acquisition intangibles.


Graphics
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
92




Property, plant and equipment including right-of-use assets
Property, plant and equipment is shown at historic purchase cost less accumulated depreciation and adjusted for any impairment.
Right-of-use assets are depreciated over the shorter of the lease term and their useful lives unless it is reasonably certain that
the Group will obtain ownership by the end of the lease term, full details of the initial recognition and ongoing measurement of
these assets is provided within the leasing policy note on pages 94 to 95. Land is not depreciated. Costs include expenditure that
is directly attributable to the acquisition of the items.
Depreciation is provided on assets so as to write off the cost of property, plant and equipment less their residual value over their
estimated useful economic lives by equal annual instalments at the following rates.
Leasehold improvements 10 – 20 per cent (or the life of the lease if shorter)
Plant and machinery 10 – 50 per cent
Fixtures and fittings 10 – 20 per cent
Estimation of the useful economic life includes an assessment of the expected rate of technological developments and the intensity
at which the assets are expected to be used.
The assets’ residual values and useful economic lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date.



Goodwill
Goodwill arising on consolidation represents the excess of the fair value of the consideration given over the fair value of the
identifiable net assets acquired. Goodwill is capitalised on the balance sheet and subject to an annual impairment test. The
carrying value of goodwill is cost less accumulated impairment. Goodwill is allocated to cash generating units for the purpose
of impairment testing. The allocation is made to those cash generating units that are expected to benefit from the business
combinations in which the goodwill arose. The Group is currently treated as a single CGU. Impairment reviews are carried out by
the Board at least annually. Impairments to goodwill are charged the income statement in the period in which they arise.




Intangible assets
Research and Development (“R&D”)
Research expenditure is expensed to the income statement as incurred. Costs incurred on internal development projects relating
to new or substantially improved products are recognised as intangible assets from the date upon which all IAS 38 criteria have
been satisfied.
In assessing the IAS 38 criteria it is considered that because of the challenges presented by the complexity of underlying software
development issues and the competitive nature of the markets in which we operate, the technical feasibility and future probability
of development has only been satisfied once the product is deployed into a live customer environment. Accordingly development
costs have not been capitalised. The Group however continues to assess the eligibility of development costs for capitalisation on
a project-by-project basis.
Costs which are incurred after the general release of internally generated software, or costs which are incurred in order to enhance
existing products by way of minor or major upgrades, or other changes in software functionality, do not satisfy the criteria in order
to capitalise. Such expenditure is therefore recognised as an expense in the period in which they are incurred and included within
research and development expense in the income statement.

Externally acquired software intellectual property rights
Rights in externally acquired software assets are capitalised at cost and amortised over their estimated useful economic life.
Useful economic life is assessed on an individual basis.
Software Intellectual Property Rights
Software Intellectual Property Rights (“IPR”) is recognised only on acquisition. The fair value is derived based on time spent on
the project at an average daily cost rate. The carrying value is stated at fair value at acquisition less accumulated amortisation and
impairment losses. The useful economic life is assessed on an individual basis. Amortisation is charged on a straight line basis over
the estimated useful economic life of the assets.




Graphics
93









Customer relationships
Client relationships are recognised only on acquisition. The fair value in respect of the Revstream acquisition was derived based
on discounted cash flows from estimated recurring revenue streams. The fair value in respect of the MPP Global acquisition
was derived based on the value of customer related assets based on future cash flows should those assets be replaced. The
carrying value is stated at fair value at acquisition less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. The useful economic life
is assessed on an individual basis. Amortisation is charged on a straight line basis over the estimated economic useful life of the
assets. For details about amortisation methods and periods used by the Group for intangible assets see note 11.




Interest income and expense
Interest is recognised using the effective interest method.




Impairment of non-financial assets
Assets that have an indefinite useful economic life are not subject to amortisation and are tested annually for impairment and
whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. Assets that are subject
to amortisation are tested for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not
be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable
amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value less costs to sell and value in use. For the purposes of
assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash flows. Non-financial
assets other than goodwill that suffered an impairment are reviewed for possible reversal of the impairment at each reporting
date. Any impairment of goodwill is not reversed.


Investments
Investments in subsidiaries are stated in the financial statements of the Company at cost less any provision for impairment.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash is defined as cash in hand and on demand deposits. Cash equivalents are defined as short term, highly liquid investments with
original maturities of three months or less.

Share-based payments
The Group operates share-based compensation plans that are equity settled. The fair value of the employee services received in
exchange for the grant of the options is recognised as an expense in the Group income statement over the vesting period with
a corresponding adjustment to equity. The expense for options granted is included within operating costs. The charge taken to
the Company income statement reflects only those options granted to employees of the Company with the remainder granted to
employees employed under subsidiary companies. These options are treated in a similar manner to capital contributions with an
addition to investments.
The total amount to be expensed over the vesting period is determined by reference to the fair value of the options granted,
excluding the impact of any non-market vesting conditions.
Non-market vesting conditions are included in assumptions about the number of options that are expected to become exercisable.
At each balance sheet date, the entity revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to become exercisable.
It recognises the impact of the revision of original estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment
to equity.
For market-based conditions, there is no re-measurement at subsequent reporting dates. Therefore, once determined, the
accounting expense will not be reduced if the performance target is not met and awards do not vest.
The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share
premium when the options are exercised.
Where the options granted have market based vesting conditions attached, the Group utilises the Monte Carlo pricing model. For
all other option grants the Black Scholes pricing model is applied.
Further details on the Group’s share based compensation plans are provided in note 30.



Graphics
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
94





Foreign currency
Items included within the financial statements of each of the Group’s entities are measured using the currency of the primary
economic environment in which the entity operates. The consolidated financial statements are presented in sterling, which is the
Group’s presentational currency.
Foreign transactions are translated into the functional currency at the exchange rate ruling when the transaction is entered
into. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation at year-end
exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement.
On consolidation, the balance sheet of each overseas subsidiary is translated at the closing rate at the date of the balance sheet,
and the income and expenses for each income statement are translated at the average exchange rate for the period subject
to revenue from overseas subsidiaries’ quarterly, half yearly or annual invoices for Annual Licence Fees or Maintenance being
recognised at the exchange rate at the point of invoicing. Exchange gains and losses arising thereon are recognised as a separate
component of equity. The main overseas balance sheets requiring translation are denominated in US Dollar, Singapore Dollar,
Polish Zloty and Canadian Dollar.
Exchange differences arising from the translation of the net investment in foreign subsidiaries are taken to shareholders’ equity
on consolidation. When a foreign operation is sold, such exchange differences are recognised in the income statement as part of
the gain or loss on sale.

Pensions
The Group operates defined contribution retirement benefit plans in respect of its UK employees and for employees in certain
overseas territories. Employee and employer contributions are based on basic earnings for the current year. The schemes are
funded by payments to trustee-administered funds completely independent of the Group’s finances. The expense is recognised
on a monthly basis as accrued. The Group has no further payment obligations once the contributions have been paid.

Tax incentive schemes
Entities within the Group are entitled to claim special tax deductions in relation to qualifying research and development expenditure.
The Group accounts for such allowances as tax credits, which means that the allowance reduces income tax payable and current
tax expense. A deferred tax asset is recognised for unclaimed tax credits that are carried forward as deferred tax assets.


Current and deferred income tax
The charge for current tax is based on the results for the year as adjusted for items which are non-assessable or disallowed. It is
calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.
Deferred income tax is provided in full, using the liability method, on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of
assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements. However, the deferred income tax is not
accounted for, if it arises from initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction other than a business combination that at
the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit and loss.
Deferred income tax is determined using tax rates (and laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance
sheet date and are expected to apply when the related deferred income tax asset is realised or the deferred income tax liability
is settled.
Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the
temporary differences can be utilised.
Deferred income tax is provided on temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries and associates, except where the
timing of the reversal of the temporary difference is controlled by the Group and it is probable that the temporary difference will
not reverse in the foreseeable future.


Trade and other receivables
Trade and other receivables are recognised initially at transaction price and to the extent that it is deemed necessary are
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment. The Group assesses
impairment on a forward-looking basis using the expected credit loss method and has applied the simplified approach which
permits the use of the lifetime expected loss provision for all trade and other receivables.
The amount of any provision is recognised in the income statement within other operating cost.



Graphics
95



Prepayments are amortised and expensed over the period they relate to, using the straight line method unless another method
better reflects the pattern of consumption. Management periodically review and reassess the recognition period to align with the
substance of the transactions.

Trade payables
Trade payables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest
method. Trade payables are generally settled on 30 day terms.

Leasing
At inception of a contract, the Group assesses whether a contract is, or contains a lease. A contract is, or contains a lease if the
contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration. To assess
whether a contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset, the Group assesses whether:
The contract involves the use of an identified asset – this may be specified explicitly or implicitly and should be physically
distinct or represent substantially all of the capacity of a physically distinct asset. If the supplier has a substantive
substitution right, then the asset is not identified;
The Group has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the asset throughout the period
of use; and
The Group has the right to direct the use of the asset. The Group has this right when it has the decision-making rights
that are most relevant to changing how and for what purposes the asset is used. In rare cases where all the decisions
about how and for what purpose the asset is used are predetermined, the Group has the right to direct the use of the
asset if either:
The Group has the right to operate the asset; or
The Group designed the asset in a way that predetermines how and for what purpose it will be used.
On lease commencement date, the Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability. The right-of-use asset is initially
measured at cost, which comprises the initial amount of the lease liability adjusted for any lease payments made at or before the
commencement date, plus any initial direct costs incurred and an estimate of costs to dismantle, less any lease incentives received.
The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method from the commencement date to the earlier of
the end of the useful life of the right-of-use asset or the end of the lease term. The estimated useful life of the right-of-use asset
is periodically reviewed and if applicable, adjusted for certain re-measurements of the lease liability.
The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments that are not paid at the commencement date,
discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease or, if that rate cannot be readily determined, the Group’s incremental
borrowing rate adjusted for lease specific and asset specific terms where required. Generally, the Group uses its incremental
borrowing rate as the discount rate adjusted for lease specific and asset specific terms where required.
Lease payments included in the measurement of the lease liability comprise:
Fixed payments, including in-substance fixed payments;
Variable lease payments that depend on an index or a rate, initially measured using the index or rate as at the
commencement date; and
Lease payments in an option renewal period if the Group is reasonably certain to exercise an extension option, and
penalties for early termination of a lease unless the Group is reasonably certain not to terminate early.
The lease liability is measured at the present value of the future minimum lease payments discounted at the incremental rate of
borrowing. It is remeasured when there is a change in future lease payments arising from a change in an index or rate, or if the
Group changes its assessment of whether it will exercise an extension or termination option.
Where the Group leases properties with no defined lease term, management have made an estimate of the remaining lease term
on commencement date based on their view of the business needs. The lease liability is then remeasured if circumstances arise
which change management’s perception of the remaining lease term and subsequent future lease payments.
If the contract includes options to break or terminate the lease which are at the right of the lessor, the Group measures the term
based on expectation that these will lapse unless it has been made aware at the time of adoption. If subsequently the lessor
decides to exercise these options, the lease liability is then remeasured due to the change in future lease payments.



Graphics
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
96



When the lease liability is remeasured in the above circumstances, a corresponding adjustment is made to the carrying value of
the right-of-use asset, or is recorded in the profit or loss if the carrying value of the right-of-use asset has been reduced to zero.
Where the Group has a legal obligation for future expenditure in relation to onerous lease properties which are either vacant or
being sublet, the right-of-use asset is adjusted by the present value of management’s best estimate of the expenditure required
to settle the present obligation. The discount rate used to determine the present value reflects current market assessments of the
time value of money and the risks specific to the lease agreement.
The Group presents right-of-use assets within “property, plant and equipment” and lease liabilities in “capital lease obligations”.
Short term lease and leases of low-value assets
The Group has elected to take the exemption not to recognise right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for short-term leases that
have a lease term of 12 months or less and leases of low-value assets. The Group defines leases of low-value assets as being any
lease agreement where the total value of payments made across the lease term is less than £5,000.
The Group recognises the lease payments associated with these leases as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease.

Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new ordinary shares or options are
shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.

Provisions
Provisions are created on the Group’s leased properties where it has a legal obligation to return them to their fair condition at
the end of their respective lease terms. The provision is measured at the present value of management’s best estimate of the
future expected repair costs required at the balance sheet date. The discount rate used to determine the present value reflects
the current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability.




Dividend distribution
Dividend distribution to the Company’s shareholders is recognised as a liability in the Group’s financial statements in the period in
which the dividends are approved by the Company’s shareholders or in respect of interim dividends when they are paid.
Dividend income
Dividend income to the Company received from subsidiary investments is recognised in the Company income statement in the
period in which it is paid.




Derivative financial instruments and hedging activities
The Group holds derivative financial instruments to hedge its foreign currency and interest rate risk exposure.
Derivatives are initially recognised and measured at fair value on the date a derivative contract is entered into and subsequently
measured at fair value. The gain or loss on re-measurement is taken to the income statement except where the derivative is a
designated hedging instrument. The accounting treatment of derivatives classified as hedges depends on their designation, which
occurs on the date that the derivative contract is committed to. At inception of the hedge relationship, the Group documents the
economic relationship between the hedging instruments and the hedged items, including whether changes in the cash flows of the
hedging instruments are expected to offset changes in the cash flows of hedged items. The Group documents its risk management
objectives and strategy for undertaking its hedging transactions. At the year-end the Group has designated its derivatives as a
hedge of the cost of a highly probable forecasted transaction commitment (‘cash flow hedge’). Gains or losses on cash flow hedges
that are regarded as highly effective are recognised in other comprehensive income. If the forecasted transaction or commitment
results in future income or expenditure, gains or losses deferred in other comprehensive income are transferred to the income
statement in the same period as the underlying income or expenditure. The ineffective portions of the gain or loss on the hedging
instrument are not recognised in other comprehensive income, rather they are recognised immediately in profit or loss.
For the portion of hedges deemed ineffective or transactions that do not qualify for hedge accounting under IFRS 9, any change
in assets or liabilities is recognised immediately in the income statement. When a hedging expires or is sold, any cumulative gain
or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the forecasted transaction is ultimately recognised
in the income statement.






Graphics
97

FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group’s trading, multi-national operations and debt financing expose it to financial risks that include the effects of changes in
foreign currency exchange rates, credit risk, liquidity and interest rates.
The Group manages these risks so as to limit any adverse effects on the financial performance of the Group.

(a) Market risk Foreign exchange
The Group’s activities expose it to foreign currency risk arising from transactions and balances denominated in currencies other
than the functional currency of the relevant Group entity. The Group’s principal foreign currency exposures arise from the Polish
Zloty, US Dollar, Canadian Dollar and Singapore Dollar.
The Group seeks to mitigate foreign currency risk where the size and timing of transactions can be forecast with reasonable
certainty. In particular, the Group hedges a significant portion of forecast Polish Zloty cash outflows using forward foreign exchange
contracts. These contracts fix the sterling amount payable in respect of future Polish Zloty denominated expenses. The average
remaining maturity of outstanding forward foreign exchange contracts at 31 December 2025 was 3 months (2024: 6 months).
In accordance with IFRS 7, the Group has performed a sensitivity analysis illustrating the estimated impact on profit before tax and
equity of a reasonably possible change in foreign exchange rates at the reporting date. Management has determined that a 5%
movement in exchange rates represents a reasonably possible change.
Translation exposure – impact on profit before tax
The table below illustrates the estimated impact of a 5% strengthening of sterling on the translation of the Group’s profit before
tax for the year ended 31 December 2025.
2025
£000
2024
£000
Polish Zloty 326 104
US Dollar 226 212
Canadian Dollar 53 65
Singapore Dollar
24 35
629 416

Translation exposure – impact on equity
The table below illustrates the estimated impact of a 5% strengthening of sterling on the translation of the Group’s foreign
currency denominated financial assets and liabilities at the reporting date.
These translation movements are recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated within the foreign currency
translation reserve and therefore affect equity rather than profit before tax.
2025
£000
2024
£000
Polish Zloty (82) (5)
US Dollar (630) (653)
Canadian Dollar (10) (23)
Singapore Dollar
(1) (1)
(723) (682)
A strengthening of sterling would result in a reduction in the Group’s net assets and equity due to the translation of foreign
currency denominated balances. A weakening of sterling would result in an equal and opposite increase in equity.



Graphics
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
98



The Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk at the end of the reporting period, expressed in Local Currency Units, was as follows:
2025 2024
PLN
CU ‘000
USD
CU ‘000
CAD
CU ‘000
SGD
CU ‘000
PLN
CU ‘000
USD
CU ‘000
CAD
CU ‘000
SGD
CU ‘000
Trade receivables
1,808 44 5,625 55
Trade payables
(542) (48) (33) (504) (69) (3)
Foreign currency
forwards
Buy foreign currency
(cash flow hedges)
32,200 69,200
(b) Market risk Interest rate
The Group’s major interest rate exposures during the year arose from both interest payable on borrowings and interest earned
on its cash balances.
In respect of interest payable on borrowings, it is the Group’s policy to enter into an interest rate swap so that there is no change
in interest payable pursuant to changes in interest rates. The fixed interest rate payable on the Group’s credit facility is 4.24%
(2024: 1.2% swap plus 1.75% margin).
The Group’s policy on interest earned from its cash balances is to maximise the return (subject to the constraints imposed by the
need to limit credit and liquidity risk as detailed below).
Given the above policies the table below approximates the impact on the Group’s profit before tax of an increase of 200 basis
points in interest rates during the year. This is deemed an appropriate level given the current economic climate.
2025
£000
2024
£000
Increase in interest receivable on cash balances
497 531
For a decrease of 200 basis points in interest rates, there would be a comparable but opposite impact on profit.


(c) Credit risk
The Group’s major credit risk exposures arise from its cash and trade receivable balances. The Group’s policies in this area are:
in respect of cash balances to ensure that deposits are always held across at least 2 financial institutions; and
in respect of trade receivables, the client or prospective client’s credit risk is assessed at the commencement of any
new project with payment terms agreed which are appropriate. Regular receivable reports are provided to senior
management.
The table below shows the credit rating and balance of the six major counterparties at the balance sheet date:
Counterparty
Current Rating
(Moody’s)
31 December
2025
Balance
£000
31 December
2024
Balance
£000
Bank A A3 10,346 14,820
Bank B A3 10,822 8,590
Bank C A3
4,268 4,198
25,436 27,608
Customer A BB+ 946 1,289
Customer B AA3 395 1,262
Customer C A1
336 849
1,677 3,400
The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses which uses a lifetime expected loss allowance
for all trade receivables.
To measure the expected credit losses, trade receivables and accrued income have been grouped based on shared credit risk
characteristics and the days past due.




Graphics
99



The expected loss rates are based on the payment profiles of sales over a period of 36 months before 31 December 2025 and the
corresponding historical credit losses experienced within this period. The historical loss rates are adjusted to reflect current and
forward looking information on macroeconomic factors affecting the ability of the customers to settle the receivables.
The contract assets relate to unbilled WIP and have substantially the same risk characteristics as the trade receivables for the
same type of contracts. The Group has therefore concluded that the expected loss rates for trade receivables are a reasonable
approximation of the loss rates for contract assets.
The gross trade receivables amount included within the loss allowance calculation has been adjusted for elements which carry no
expected credit loss; this being the upfront annual licence fees of £3,329,000 (2024: £5,942,000).
Where the Company holds intercompany loan amounts due from fellow group subsidiaries, IFRS 9 requires the measurement of
expected credit losses. These loans were determined to be stage 1 intercompany loans for the purposes of the IFRS 9 impairment
model and consequently a twelve month expected credit loss was calculated.
On that basis, the loss allowance for trade receivables and contract assets as at 31 December 2025 for the Group was calculated
as follows:
2025
Not past due
£000
Less than one
month overdue
£000
One to two
months
overdue
£000
Two to three
months
overdue
£000
More than
three months
overdue
£000
Total
£000
Gross carrying amount of trade receivables 3,169 2,443 772 142 371 6,897
Less: upfront annual licence fees
(3,016) (313) (3,329)
Amounts subject to loss allowance
153 2,130 772 142 371 3,568
Expected loss rate 1% 5% 10% 15% 20%
Specific loss allowance
Loss allowance
2 113 79 22 75 291
Total
2 113 79 22 75 291
2024
Not past due
£000
Less than one
month overdue
£000
One to two
months
overdue
£000
Two to three
months
overdue
£000
More than
three months
overdue
£000
Total
£000
Gross carrying amount of trade receivables 6,441 3,247 1,171 336 2,002 13,197
Less: upfront annual licence fees
(5,942) (5,942)
Amounts subject to loss allowance
499 3,247 1,171 336 2,002 7,255
Expected loss rate 1% 5% 10% 15% 20%
Specific loss allowance 373 373
Loss allowance
5 162 117 50 400 734
Total
5 162 117 50 773 1,107
The ECL table has been updated to provide better clarity and transparency to the users (with the comparatives updated on a
consistent basis).
The loss allowance for the Company was calculated as being £Nil (2024: £Nil).
Trade receivables are written off where there is no reasonable expectation of recovery.


(d) Liquidity risk
The Group’s major liquidity exposures arise from the need to settle its trade, employee and taxation liabilities as they fall due.
Whilst the Group is comfortably able to finance all of these payments out of operating cash flows, policies are in place to further
limit exposure to liquidity risk:
surplus cash is never deposited for maturities of longer than 110 days; and
uncommitted facilities will be entered into to support any specific expansion opportunities that arise.
Management monitors forecasts of the Group’s liquidity reserve on the basis of expected cash flow. The Group’s liquidity
management policy involves projecting cash flows in major currencies and considering the level of liquid assets necessary to
meet these.



Graphics
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
100

The table below analyses the Group’s financial liabilities and net-settled derivative financial liabilities into relevant maturity
groupings based on the remaining period at the balance sheet to the contractual maturity date. The amounts disclosed in the
table are the contractual undiscounted cash flows including interest.
Group
Carrying
amount
£000
Less than
1 year
£000
Between
1 and 2 years
£000
Between
2 and 5 years
£000
After
5 years
£000
Total
£000
At 31 December 2025
Borrowings 5,940 1,670 1,570 3,683 6,923
Capital lease obligations 2,397 622 735 1,097 181 2,635
Trade and other payables
8,837 8,837 8,837
17,174 11,129 2,305 4,780 181 18,395
Carrying
amount
£000
Less than
1 year
£000
Between
1 and 2 years
£000
Between
2 and 5 years
£000
After
5 years
£000
Total
£000
At 31 December 2024
Borrowings 7,180 7,373 7,373
Capital lease obligations 2,943 633 844 1,267 544 3,288
Derivative financial instruments 214 214 214
Trade and other payables
7,468 7,468 7,468
17,805 15,688 844 1,267 544 18,343
Company
Carrying
amount
£000
Less than
1 year
£000
Between
1 and 2 years
£000
Between 2
and 5 years
£000
After
5 years
£000
Total
£000
At 31 December 2025
Borrowings 5,940 1,670 1,570 3,683 6,923
Trade and other payables
466 466 466
6,406 2,136 1,570 3,683 7,389
Carrying
amount
£000
Less than
1 year
£000
Between
1 and 2 years
£000
Between
2 and 5 years
£000
After
5 years
£000
Total
£000
At 31 December 2024
Borrowings 7,180 7,373 7,373
Trade and other payables
3,577 3,577 3,577
10,757 10,950 10,950
The table below analyses the Group’s derivative financial instruments which will be settled on a gross basis into the relevant
maturity groups based on the remaining period at the balance sheet to the contractual maturity date. The amounts disclosed in
the table are the contractual undiscounted cash flows.
Less than
1 year
£000
Between
1 and 2 years
£000
Between
2 and 5 years
£000
At 31 December 2025
Forward foreign exchange contracts
– cash flow hedges
Outflow (6,491)
Inflow 6,660
Interest rate swap
– cash flow hedges
Outflow (165) (151) (99)
Inflow
221 179 123
225 28 24



Graphics
101

Less than
1 year
£000
Between
1 and 2 years
£000
Between
2 and 5 years
£000
At 31 December 2024
Forward foreign exchange contracts
– cash flow hedges
Outflow (13,533)
Inflow 13,338
Interest rate swap
– cash flow hedges
Outflow (81) (66)
Inflow
311 222
35 156



FAIR VALUE ESTIMATION
Financial instruments not measured at fair value
Financial instruments not measured at fair value includes cash and cash equivalents, trade and other receivables, trade and other
payables, and loans and borrowings (including capitalised lease obligations), however, due to their short term nature and ability
to be liquidated at short notice their carrying value approximates their fair value.
Financial instruments measured at fair value
The fair value hierarchy of the financial instruments measured at fair value is provided below.
Level 2
2025
£’000
2024
£’000
Financial Assets
Derivative financial assets (designated hedge instruments)
272 387
272 387
Financial Liabilities
Derivative financial liabilities (designated hedge instruments)
214
214
The derivative financial assets and liabilities have been valued using the market approach, using actual market transactions for
similar instruments and forward curves, which are considered to be Level 2 inputs. There were no changes to the valuation
techniques used in the year. There were no transfers between levels during the year.


CAPITAL RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group’s capital is considered by the Board to be the equity of the Company’s shareholders and includes the Group’s tangible
and intangible fixed assets and cash and debt balances. The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the
Group’s ability to continue as a going concern in order to provide returns for shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders
and to maintain an optimal capital structure to reduce the cost of capital. In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the
Group may adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, issue new shares or sell assets to
reduce debt.
Aptitude Software Group plc manages the capital structure based on the economic conditions and the risk characteristics of the
Group. The Board reviews the capital structure regularly. No changes were made to our objectives and processes during 2025.
Our general funding policy is to raise long term debt when required to meet the anticipated requirements of the Group. Details of
the Group’s existing loan facility is provided in note 19 to the financial statements.


Graphics
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
102
CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS
Accounting judgments
(a) Recognition of revenue
The policy for the recognition of software licences, maintenance and subscription fees is detailed on pages 88 to 91.
Assessment of performance obligations
For Annual Licence Fees, the Group determines for each contract whether ongoing contractual software maintenance and
subscription fees represent a performance obligation that is distinct from the licence. For all existing contracts, it is determined
that the ongoing contractual obligations form part of a combined performance obligation with the software licence. This is through
the customer simultaneously receiving the benefit of accessing and utilising the software from inception of the contract across the
period due to the need for the software to adapt over time to the changing needs and complexities of the regulatory environment.
For product specific consultancy, the Group also concludes for each contract as to whether this represents a separate, distinct
performance obligation from the licence. For all existing contracts, the services being provided met the criteria of being a separate,
distinct performance obligation on the basis that contractually the customer could choose to purchase the services elsewhere
without significantly affecting the promises included in the licence and maintenance agreement.
How the combined performance obligation should be recognised
Once the Group concludes on the revenue recognition profile, the business determines on a contract by contract basis the
period over which the revenues are recognised. This period is defined as the optimisation period and represents the duration of
time assessed by management during which the most significant optimisation and functional enhancements of the software is
undertaken. Where the optimisation period for a client is assessed by management as being greater than the initial term of the
contract, the revenues recognised across the minimum term are equal to the total value of the contract.
Revenue recognition constraint
During the period from the Group initially licencing its software to the product being deployed into a live client environment,
an ongoing assessment is performed by management on a contract by contract basis to determine if sufficient challenges exist
that would cast doubt over future economic benefits being realised by the business. Where such challenges exist, the revenue
recognised across the period is constrained to the value of any amount invoiced and paid prior to the end of the reporting date,
with this being assessed as the consideration during the period up to deployment. Once the software is deployed, the amount
of revenue recognised is adjusted so that it is proportional to the Group’s development effort to date against the total expected
development hours to be incurred across the contract period.
Product specific consultancy deferral
For any implementation service contract where the client is contracting on a time and materials basis, an assessment is made
by management at the year-end of the expected amount of any additional consultancy effort to be provided to satisfy certain
contractual obligations without incremental charge. Where such effort is anticipated, an accompanying deferral is calculated
based on the value of this time if charged to the client and is recognised through the deferral of revenues.


Graphics
103
(b) Impairment of goodwill
Determining whether goodwill is impaired requires an estimation of the value in use of the cash generating units to which goodwill
has been allocated. The judgement is in relation to the allocation to a single CGU. The Group has determined that it has only one
cash generating unit at the year end, this being the Aptitude business.
This determination was made with reference to the following principal factors:
Information provided to management and the Board utilised to assess the performance of the business and make decisions
is done on a consolidated Group basis;
Key management personnel are compensated based on the performance of the business as a whole;
Operating and capital budgets are only approved or modified by management based on financial information for the business
as a whole;
Clients are serviced across the Group’s global offices meaning each regions cash inflows and assets are not independent from
other regions; and
Clients often purchase one or more of the Group’s highly complementary and integrated products as part of an all-in price
removing any possibility to accurately determine the recoverable amount on each. Consequently, the products’ cash inflows
and assets are not independent from other products.
(c) Impairment of other intangibles
The Group also assesses annually any indicators that other intangible assets might be impaired. The impairment tests are based
on value-in-use calculations on a similar basis to that used in the impairment of Goodwill calculation and is therefore subject to
the same estimates by management.
(d) Impairment of investments
The Group has also carried out an impairment review on the value of investments held in the Company. Where the investment is
held in a company which has an ongoing trade, the value is derived by a value in use calculation of the cash generating units. This
is done on a similar basis to that used in the impairment of goodwill calculation as detailed above and is therefore subject to the
same estimates by management. Where the investment is held in a company which is no longer trading, the value is derived from
the carrying value of the net assets on the balance sheet of the entity.
(e) Development costs
The Group invests on a continual basis in the development of new and enhanced features in the product suite. There is a continual
process of enhancements to and expansion of the overall product suite with judgement required in assessing whether the
development costs meet the criteria for capitalisation. These judgements have been applied consistently year to year. In making
this judgement, the Group evaluates, amongst other factors, whether there are future economic benefits beyond the current
period, the stage at which technical feasibility has been achieved, management’s intention to complete and use or sell the product,
the likelihood of success, availability of technical and financial resources to complete the development phase and management’s
ability to measure reliably the expenditure attributable to the project. Judgement is therefore required in determining the practice
for capitalising development costs. The accounting policy for research and product development is detailed on pages 92 to 93 and
in the current year there are no development expenses that have been capitalised (2024: £Nil). The total product management,
research and development expenditure in the period is £13.2 million (2024: £17.7 million). Given the challenges surrounding
the complexity of underlying software development issues and the competitive nature of the markets in which we operate,
management’s judgement is that technical feasibility and future probability of development has only been satisfied once the
product is deployed into a live client environment. Accordingly, these development costs have not been capitalised. Costs which
are incurred after the general release of internally generated software, or costs which are incurred in order to enhance existing
products by way of minor or major upgrades, or other changes in software functionality, do not satisfy the criteria in order
to capitalise. Such expenditure is therefore recognised as an expense in the period in which it is incurred and included within
research and development expense in the income statement.


Graphics
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
104
(f) Contingent liabilities
The Group reviews any potential claims, if applicable, to assess if there are any possible obligations, as it has yet to be confirmed
whether the entity has a present obligation, or any present obligations of which it is either not probable that an outflow of
resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation, or a sufficiently reliable estimate of the amount
of the obligation cannot be made. Where any of these conditions are met, a contingent liability is disclosed.
(g) Taxation
Deferred tax assets and liabilities require management judgement in determining the amount to be recognised.
In particular, judgement is used when assessing the extent to which deferred tax assets should be recognised with consideration
given to the timing and level of future taxable income.
(h) Impairment of receivables
The Group applies the expected credit loss model under IFRS 9 when assessing the recoverability of trade receivables. The
determination of the loss allowance requires management judgement.
In estimating expected credit losses, the Group considers a range of factors including the ageing profile of receivables, the
creditworthiness and payment history of individual customers, and the existence of any known financial difficulties affecting
customers. Where there are indicators of increased credit risk, management assesses the probability of default and the expected
level of recovery, taking into account customer-specific circumstances and available forward-looking information where relevant.
For the purposes of measuring expected credit losses, the Group considers a financial asset to be in default when, based on
management’s judgement, it is unlikely that the outstanding contractual amounts will be fully recovered. Indicators of default
include significant financial difficulty of the customer, insolvency, breach of contract, or other adverse information affecting
the customer’s ability to pay. While the ageing of receivables is a key input into this assessment, the Group does not apply a
fixed number of days past due to determine default, but instead considers all relevant qualitative and quantitative factors. This
approach is consistent with the Group’s credit risk management practices and historical loss experience.
The loss allowance therefore reflects management’s assessment of the likelihood of default and the expected credit losses arising
from outstanding receivables at the reporting date. Changes in customer credit risk, economic conditions or assumptions regarding
recoverability could result in a material adjustment to the carrying value of trade receivables in future periods.
ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES
(a) Recognition of revenue
Method of recognising revenue
Where the software licence and maintenance fees meet the criteria of a combined performance obligation, the Group determines
for each contract the most appropriate method of recognising revenue in line with development activity related to the relevant
product. Measurement of the development activity is completed by way of the input method, with management providing an
initial estimate of the overall expected development hours to be incurred across the period. This estimate is then reviewed against
actual hours incurred at the end of each reporting period.
The estimation of the development activity, principally the number of hours anticipated to be incurred, impacts all customer
contracts and therefore as at 31 December 2025, the deferred income balance of £28.2 million (2024: £32.2 million) and accrued
income balance £1.8 million (2024: £0.8 million) have been calculated pursuant to estimates. Sensitivity analysis was performed
with management considering the impact of a 5% proportional movement in the estimated development effort and determined
that in all cases, with all other variables being held constant, the impact on the assets and liabilities presented across both periods
was not material.
Product specific consultancy deferral
As outlined with the accounting judgments applied to the recognition of revenue, management make a deferral of revenue at
the year-end of the expected amount of any additional consultancy effort to be provided to satisfy certain contractual obligations
without incremental charge. Where such effort is anticipated, management estimate the amount required along with the
accompanying value of this time if charged to the client. The estimate for 2025 is £429,000 (2024: £541,000). Sensitivity analysis
was performed with management considering the impact of a 5% proportional movement in the estimated consultancy effort and
determined that in all cases the impact on the assets and liabilities presented across both periods was not material.


Graphics
105
(b) Taxation
Income tax
The actual tax the Group pays on its profits is determined according to complex tax laws and regulations. Where the effect of
these laws and regulations is unclear, judgements and estimates are used in determining the liability for the tax to be paid on past
profits which are then recognised in the financial statements. The Group believes the estimates, assumptions and judgements are
reasonable but this can involve complex issues which may take a number of years to resolve. The final determination of prior year
tax liabilities could be different from the estimates reflected in the financial statements and may result in the recognition of an
additional tax expense or tax credit in the income statement.
USA sales and use tax
The Group continues to review its liability to tax its supplies in a number of states following changes in the interpretation and
application of sales tax regulations in the USA. Whilst for the majority of states this review has been concluded, the Group still
considers that there is risk, that some elements of its supplies in a few remaining states would have been subject to sales tax in
previous periods. Consequently, the Group holds a provision totalling £0.3 million (2024: £0.3 million) at the year-end equating
to the potential historic sales tax liability the business is exposed to as a result of the risk of non-recoverability from its clients
who will bear these costs going forwards. The value of this provision has been determined based on management’s estimate of
which supplies it believes are captured by the regulation, which clients we have a risk of non-recoverability from and over what
historic period this provision should be held against. Sensitivity analysis was performed with management considering the impact
of a reasonable proportional movement in the estimates applied and determined that in all cases the impact on the assets and
liabilities presented across both periods was not material.
(c) Impairment of goodwill
The value in use calculation requires the Group to estimate the future cash flows expected to arise from the cash generating
unit and a suitable discount rate in order to calculate present value. The discount rate applied in the value in use calculation
approximates to the Group’s Weighted Average Cost of Capital. The Group annually reviews the goodwill valuation based on
various scenarios and each of these scenarios have different growth rate assumptions. The growth rate assumptions are in relation
to periods covered by Board approved plans. Details of these scenarios, growth rate assumptions and sensitivities are provided in
note 10. Impairment reviews during the year are performed against the carrying value of goodwill. The impairment is recognised
in the income statements in the period which it is deemed to arise.


Graphics
106
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
Financial Statements
1. Segmental Information
Business segments
The Board has determined the operating segments based on the reports it receives from management to make
strategic decisions.
The reports from management consist of one segment, the Aptitude business. Therefore, the only business segment for
both periods was Aptitude and therefore no segmental analysis is provided for this or the corresponding period.
The principal activity of the Group throughout 2024 and 2025 was the provision of business-critical software and services.
Geographical segments
The Group has two geographical segments for reporting purposes, the United Kingdom and the Rest of the World.
The following table provides an analysis of the Group’s sales by origin and by destination along with the profit before tax.
Sales revenue by origin Sales revenue by destination Profit before income tax
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
United Kingdom 32,578 38,430 10,586 12,220 2,779 3,557
Rest of World 32,376 31,614 54,368 57,824 1,861 2,036
64,954 70,044 64,954 70,044 4,640 5,593
The following is an analysis of the carrying amount of non-current assets (excluding deferred and income tax assets), and
additions to property, plant and equipment (excluding right-of-use asset additions resulting from property lease agreements)
and intangible assets, analysed by the geographical area in which the assets are located.
Carrying amount of
non-current assets Capital expenditure
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
United Kingdom 48,910 51,130 297 187
Rest of World 13,166 15,034 439 1,414
62,076 66,164 736 1,601


Graphics
107


2. Revenue from contracts with customers
(a) Analysis of revenue from contracts with customers
The Group derives revenue from the transfer of goods and services in the following major product lines and geographical
regions:
Continuing operations
Recurring revenue
Year ended 31 Dec 2025
Non-recurring revenue
Year ended 31 Dec 2025
United
Kingdom
£000
Rest of World
£000
Total
£000
United
Kingdom
£000
Rest of World
£000
Total
£000
Total
£000
Revenue from external
customers
8,557 45,439 53,996 2,029 8,929 10,958 64,954
Recurring revenue
Year ended 31 Dec 2024
Non-recurring revenue
Year ended 31 Dec 2024
United
Kingdom
£000
Rest of World
£000
Total
£000
United
Kingdom
£000
Rest of World
£000
Total
£000
Total
£000
Revenue from external
customers 9,956 44,471 54,427 2,264 13,353 15,617 70,044
All of the revenue displayed in the above table is recognised over time in line with the Group’s accounting policy detailed on
pages 89 to 91 and has been generated from contracts with customers.
For recurring revenue, the Group typically receives payment for its licence and maintenance fees annually in advance of the
performance obligations being satisfied. Non-recurring revenue is paid as and when either the services have been provided
or, in the case of fixed price projects in line with the payment schedule.
During both periods presented the Group had no customers whose revenue represented an amount equal to or exceeding
10% of total revenue.
(b) Assets and liabilities related to contracts with customers
The Group has recognised contract assets and contract liabilities relating to contracts with customers. These amounts are
classified as accrued and deferred income respectively for the purposes of this report and are displayed within notes 16
and 20.
(i) Significant movements in accrued and deferred income
Contract assets have increased against the prior year to £1.8 million at 31 December 2025 (31 December 2024: £0.8 million)
due to timing differences on when the software or service was provided against when it has been invoiced to the customer.
Contract liabilities have decreased in the year to £28.2 million (31 December 2024: £32.2 million).
(ii) Revenue recognised in relation to deferred income
The following table shows how much of the revenue recognised in the current reporting period relates to the release of the
carried-forward deferred income balance on 31 December of the previous period:
Group
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Revenue recognised that was included in the deferred income balance at 31 December of the previous period 30,943 30,600




Graphics
108
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements

2. Revenue from contracts with customers (continued)
(iii) Revenue yet to be recognised on long-term contracts
The following table details the value of future contracted revenue resulting from the Group’s fixed price long term software
and services contracts which is yet to be recognised in the income statement due to the relevant contractual performance
obligations not being satisfied before the year end. These amounts are set to be recognised in the Group’s income statement
across the period 1 January 2026 to 31 December 2030 on a contract by contract basis as and when the performance
obligations are met:
Group
As at 31 Dec
2025
£000
Group
As at 31 Dec
2024
£000
Aggregate amount of future contracted revenue in relation to long-term software and service contracts that is not
recognised in the income statement as at 31 December 83,418 78,026
Group
As at 31 Dec
2025
£000
Group
As at 31 Dec
2024
£000
Revenue to be recognised in the Group’s income statement:
Within one year 39,768 45,586
Within two to five years 43,650 32,440
After five years
83,418 78,026
All other software and service contracts are billed based on time incurred. As permitted under IFRS 15, these amounts have
been excluded for the purposes of the above calculation given the variable nature.
(iv) Assets recognised from costs to fulfil a contract
In addition to the contract balances disclosed above, the Group has also recognised an asset in relation to the commission
costs of obtaining a contract. This is amortised on a straight-line basis over the optimisation period assessed by management
and presented within other long-term assets in the balance sheet. See further details on the optimisation period within the
revenue recognition policy.
Group
As at 31 Dec
2025
£000
Group
As at 31 Dec
2024
£000
Asset recognised from costs incurred to fulfil a contract at 31 December 530 730
Amortisation recognised as cost of providing services during the year from continuing operations 611 488



Graphics
109

3. Operating costs
The following items are included in operating costs:
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Employee benefit expense (Note 4) 32,375 40,620
Depreciation and amortisation of externally acquired intangibles 1,314 1,370
Other operating costs 21,233 18,136
54,922 60,126
Non-underlying operating costs:
Amortisation of acquisition intangibles 3,447 3,381
Reorganisation costs 1,779 862
5,226 4,243
60,148 64,369
The reorganisation costs relate to restructuring within the Product and Technology departments. The costs in both years
mainly relate to redundancy costs as part of a specific, time-bound programme and is not expected to recur on an ongoing
basis.
Profit from continuing operations has been arrived at after charging:
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Net foreign exchange (losses)/gains (4) 129
Research and development costs 13,176 17,658
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 1,208 1,304
(Loss)/gain on disposal of fixed assets 6 (12)
Amortisation of externally acquired intangibles 66 66
Repairs and maintenance expenditure on property, plant and equipment 135 196
Low value or short term rental expense 229 437
During the year the group obtained the following services from the Group’s auditors at costs as detailed below:
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Fees payable to Company’s auditors for the audit of the Parent Company and consolidated financial statements 285 290
Fees payable to the Company’s auditors and its associates for other services:
– the audit of Company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation 20 22
305 312
A description of the work of the Audit Committee is included in the corporate governance statement on pages 39 to 44 and
includes an explanation of how auditor objectivity and independence is safeguarded when non-audit services are provided
by the auditors. No non-audit services were provided in the current or prior year.



Graphics
110
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements


4. Employees and directors
Group
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Company
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Company
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Employee benefit expense during the year
Wages and salaries 28,778 36,533 261 297
Social security costs 2,203 2,351 39 46
Other pension costs 1,015 1,125
Share based payment costs on share options 379 611
32,375 40,620 300 343
Average monthly number of employees (including directors) for the Group and Company:
Group
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
Number
Group
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
Number
Company
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
Number
Company
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
Number
By location:
United Kingdom 102 132 3 4
Rest of World 257 333
359 465 3 4
Group headcount at 31 December 2025 was 317 (2024: 449).

Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Key management compensation:
Short-term employee benefits 1,328 1,709
Social security costs 79 116
Post employment benefits 28 47
Termination benefits 162
Share based payment costs on share options 282 245
1,879 2,117
Key management compensation for the Group includes the Board of the Company and senior executives within the Group.
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Directors:
Short-term employee benefits 718 836
Social security costs 45 61
Post employment benefits 10 19
Share based payment costs on share options 159 147
932 1,063
Average monthly number of Directors and senior executives in respect of continuing operations were 7 (2024: 10). The key
management figures given above include the Directors of Aptitude Software Group plc.
The information on Directors’ remuneration required by the Companies Act and the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct
Authority is contained in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 45 to 66. Amounts displayed throughout the tables
above exclude the impact of long term incentive awards and Deferred Bonus Plan awards which have either been exercised
in the year or have vested but are yet to be exercised.



Graphics
111




5. Net finance cost
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Finance income
Interest on bank deposits 146 368
146 368
Finance cost
Interest payable on bank borrowings (including amortization of fees and hedging) (83) (331)
Interest payable on corporation tax (118)
Interest payable on lease liabilities (111) (119)
(312) (450)
Net finance cost (166) (82)







6. Income tax expense
Analysis of charge in the year
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Current tax:
– tax charge on underlying items (1,763) (1,562)
– tax credit on non-underlying items 445
– adjustment to tax in respect of prior periods on underlying items 105 192
Total current tax (1,213) (1,370)
Deferred tax (note 15):
– tax charge on underlying items (189) (114)
– tax credit on non-underlying items 887 871
– adjustment to tax in respect of prior periods on underlying items (101)
Total deferred tax 597 757
Income tax expense (616) (613)

The total tax charge on underlying items of £2.0 million (2024: £1.7 million) comprises current tax of £1.7 million (2024:
£1.6 million) and deferred tax of £0.3 million (2024: £0.1 million), including prior year adjustments.
The net adjustment to tax in respect of prior periods on underlying items totalling £Nil (2024: £0.2 million) relates to the
reduction in the assumed benefit from research and development relief in the UK.
In addition to the amounts recognised in profit or loss, deferred tax of £0.1 million (2024: £0.2 million) has been recognised
in other comprehensive income and £0.2 million (2024: £0.1 million) directly in equity (see Note 15).
UK corporation tax is calculated at 25% (2024: 25%) of the estimated assessable profit for the year. Taxation for other
jurisdictions is calculated at the rates prevailing in the respective jurisdictions.


Graphics
112
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
6. Income tax expense (continued)
The tax for the year is lower than (2024: lower than) the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 25% (2024: 25%). The
differences are explained below:
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Profit before tax 4,640 5,593
Tax at the UK corporation tax rate of 25% (2024: 25%) (1,160) (1,398)
Effects of:
Adjustment to tax in respect of prior periods 4 192
Adjustment in respect of foreign tax rates 364 67
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes (290) (69)
Other 5 190
Research and development tax relief (26) 124
Recognition of tax losses not previously recognised 487 300
Change in future tax rates (19)
Total taxation (616) (613)
The total tax charge of £0.6 million (2024: £0.6 million) represents 13.3% (2024: 11.0%) of the Group profit before tax of
£4.6 million (2024: £5.6 million).


Graphics
113
7. Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders by the weighted average
number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year.
For diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue is adjusted to assume conversion of
all dilutive potential ordinary shares. The Group has dilutive potential ordinary shares in the form of share options granted to
employees where the exercise price is less than the average market price of the Company’s ordinary shares during the year.
The calculation of the basic and diluted earnings per share is based on the following data:
Year ended 31 Dec 2025 Year ended 31 Dec 2024
Earnings
£000
Weighted
average
number of
shares (in
thousands)
Per-share
amount pence
Earnings
£000
Weighted
average
number of
shares (in
thousands)
Per-share
amount pence
Basic EPS
Earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders 4,024 55,360 7.3 4,980 56,837 8.8
Effect of dilutive securities:
– share options 1,541 (0.2) 1,010 (0.2)
Diluted EPS 4,024 56,901 7.1 4,980 57,847 8.6
To provide an indication of the underlying operating performance per share the adjusted profit after tax figure shown below
excludes non-underlying and other items and has a tax charge using the effective rate of 24.7% (2024: 20.1%).
Year ended 31 Dec 2025 Year ended 31 Dec 2024
Basic EPS
pence
Diluted EPS
pence
Basic EPS
pence
Diluted EPS
pence
Earnings per share 7.3 7.1 8.8 8.6
Non-underlying items net of tax 7.0 6.8 5.9 5.8
Prior years’ tax charge (0.0) (0.0) (0.3) (0.3)
Recognition of tax losses (0.9) (0.9) (0.5) (0.5)
Adjusted earnings per share 13.4 13.0 13.9 13.6
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Profit before tax and non-underlying items 9,866 9,836
Tax charge at a rate of 24.7% (2024: 20.1%) (2,439) (1,976)
7,427 7,860
Tax adjustments in respect of prior years 4 192
Non-underlying items net of tax (3,894) (3,372)
Recognition of tax losses not previously recognised 487 300
Profit on ordinary activities after tax 4,024 4,980


Graphics
114
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
8. Dividends
2025
pence
per share
2024
pence
per share
2025
£000
2024
£000
Dividends paid:
Interim dividend 1.80 1.80 997 1,024
Final dividend (prior year) 3.60 3.60 2,002 2,057
5.40 5.40 2,999 3,081
Proposed but not recognised as a liability:
Final dividend (current year) 3.60 3.60 1,966 2,006
The proposed final dividend was approved by the Board on 7 April 2026 but was not included as a liability as at 31 December
2025, in accordance with IAS 10 ‘Events after the Balance Sheet date’. If approved by the shareholders at the Annual General
Meeting this final dividend will be payable on 12 June 2026 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on
22 May 2026.


9. Property, plant and equipment including right-of-use assets
Right-of-use
assets
£000
Leasehold
improvements
£000
Plant &
machinery
£000
Fixtures &
fittings
£000
Total
£000
Group
Cost
At 1 January 2025 3,806 311 5,653 1,052 10,822
Additions 723 13 736
Disposals (590) (1) (591)
Exchange movements (40) 115 2 77
At 31 December 2025 3,766 311 5,901 1,066 11,044
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2025 1,210 305 4,677 614 6,806
Charge for the year (Note 3) 494 1 530 183 1,208
Disposals (584) (1) (585)
Exchange movements (29) 73 (4) 40
At 31 December 2025 1,675 306 4,696 792 7,469
Net book amount
At 31 December 2025 2,091 5 1,205 274 3,575



Graphics
115


9. Property, plant and equipment including right-of-use assets (continued)
Right-of-use
assets
£000
Leasehold
improvements
£000
Plant &
machinery
£000
Fixtures &
fittings
£000
Total
£000
Group
Cost
At 1 January 2024 3,403 413 5,586 985 10,387
Additions 398 340 141 879
Disposals (120) (198) (65) (383)
Exchange movements 5 18 (75) (9) (61)
At 31 December 2024 3,806 311 5,653 1,052 10,822
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2024 742 397 4,407 357 5,903
Charge for the year (Note 3) 458 2 521 323 1,304
Disposals (107) (198) (64) (369)
Exchange movements 10 13 (53) (2) (32)
At 31 December 2024 1,210 305 4,677 614 6,806
Net book amount
At 31 December 2024 2,596 6 976 438 4,016

All the Group’s right-of-use assets relate to the capital lease agreements for various office space.
Plant &
machinery
£000
Total
£000
Company
Cost
At 1 January 2025 471 471
Additions 39 39
Disposals
At 31 December 2025 510 510
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2025 458 458
Charge for the year 11 11
Disposals
At 31 December 2025 469 469
Net book amount
At 31 December 2025 41 41
Plant &
machinery
£000
Total
£000
Company
Cost
At 1 January 2024 471 471
Additions
Disposals
At 31 December 2024 471 471
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2024 447 447
Charge for the year 11 11
Disposals
At 31 December 2024 458 458
Net book amount
At 31 December 2024 13 13



Graphics
116
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements


10. Goodwill
31 Dec 2025
£000
31 Dec 2024
£000
Cost
At 1 January 46,006 46,006
At 31 December 46,006 46,006
Net book amount 46,006 46,006
Goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated, at acquisition, to the cash generating units (CGUs) that are expected
to benefit from that business combination. The carrying amount of goodwill has been allocated as follows:
Aptitude
£000
Total
£000
At 1 January and 31 December 2025 46,006 46,006
The Group tests goodwill annually for impairment, or more frequently if there are indications that goodwill might be impaired.
The group is a single CGU and determining whether goodwill is impaired requires an estimation of the value in use of the
CGU to which all goodwill has been allocated. The value in use calculation requires the Group to estimate the future cash
flows expected to arise from the CGU and a suitable discount rate in order to calculate present value.
For the purposes of performing the goodwill impairment review, the Group have utilised the Board approved plans for
the three-year period to 31st December 2028 followed by anticipated growth in operating profit of 10% per annum for
the period 2029-2030. The growth rates and assumptions applied were based on the Group’s assessment of the future
opportunities within the market, with no change in working capital assumptions and the existing loan to be repaid in full on
termination date.
In determining the values, management have utilised Board approved plans and market consensus data.
The terminal growth rates for the period after 2030 are no greater than 2.25% (2024: 2.25%) per annum. The utilisation of
deferred tax losses to offset the tax payable has not been considered. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash
flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects the current market assessments of
the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. The discount rate applied to the CGU was 14.9% (2024: 14.1%).
Sensitivity analysis was performed on key assumptions, including forecast cash flows, terminal growth rates and the discount
rate. Management considers that no reasonably possible change in these assumptions would result in the carrying amount
of the CGU exceeding its recoverable amount.




Graphics
117

11. Intangible assets
Software IPR
£000
Customer
relationships
£000
Externally
acquired
licenses
£000
Total
£000
Group
Cost
At 1 January 2025 17,872 10,869 1,120 29,861
Additions
At 31 December 2025 17,872 10,869 1,120 29,861
Accumulated amortisation and impairment
At 1 January 2025 8,862 5,521 66 14,449
Amortisation 2,109 1,272 66 3,447
At 31 December 2025 10,971 6,793 132 17,896
Net book amount
At 31 December 2025 6,901 4,076 988 11,965
Software IPR
£000
Customer
relationships
£000
Externally
acquired
licenses
£000
Total
£000
Group
Cost
At 1 January 2024 17,872 10,869 28,741
Additions 1,120 1,120
At 31 December 2024 17,872 10,869 1,120 29,861
Accumulated amortisation and impairment
At 1 January 2024 6,753 4,249 11,002
Amortisation 2,109 1,272 66 3,447
At 31 December 2024 8,862 5,521 66 14,449
Net book amount
At 31 December 2024 9,010 5,348 1,054 15,412

The Company held no intangible assets during the year (2024: £Nil).
The externally acquired software intellectual property rights (IPR) relates to expected future benefits of software and
development projects in progress at the date of acquisition of the Group’s subsidiaries. As at 31 December 2025 no internal
research and development costs have been capitalised. The client relationships relate to expected benefits to be obtained
from recurring levels of business from clients obtained as a result of acquisitions. The useful lives of the intangible assets
acquired as part of the acquisition of Revstream in 2017 have been determined as 10 years in respect of both software IPR
and customer relationships (2024: 10 years). The useful lives of the intangible assets acquired as part of the acquisition of
MPP Global in 2021 have been determined as 8 years in respect of both software IPR and customer relationships (2024:
8 years). At 31 December 2025, the carrying value of the intangible assets in relation to Revstream is £1.4 million (2024:
£2.3 million). The carrying value of the intangible assets in relation to MPP Global is £9.6 million (2024: £12.1 million).
The amortisation charge in the year, relating to intellectual property rights recognised on acquisitions, is presented within
non-underlying costs as it is a non-cash charge arising from acquisition accounting and is not considered reflective of the
Group’s underlying trading performance.


Graphics
118
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements

12. Investment in subsidiaries
The Group did not hold any investments in 2025 (2024: Nil).
2025
£000
2024
£000
Company
Cost
At 1 January 98,369 97,758
Share based payments – share options granted to employees of subsidiaries 379 611
At 31 December 98,748 98,369
Impairment
At 1 January and 31 December 28,950 28,950
Net book amount
At 31 December 69,798 69,419
Investments are held at cost less provisions for impairment. If there is an impairment trigger then the recoverable amounts
of the investments are determined by calculating a value in use for the appropriate subsidiary investment. Management
estimates discount rates using pre–tax rates that reflect current market assessments of the time value of money and the
risks specific to the subsidiary investments.
Where the investment is held in a company which is no longer trading, the value is derived from the carrying value of the net
assets on the balance sheet of that entity.
The Directors consider the value of the investments to be supported by their underlying assets and consider there to be no
indicators of impairment.
Subsidiaries Country Activity
Aptitude Software (Canada) Limited* Canada Employment and Group Services
Aptitude Software Inc. * USA Software and Services
Aptitude Software Limited** England & Wales Software and Services
Aptitude Software (Poland) sp. z o.o. * Poland Development
Aptitude Software (Singapore) pte. Limited Singapore Software and Services
Aptitude Revstream Inc. * USA Software and Services
MPP Global Solutions Limited** England & Wales Software and Services
MPP Global Solutions Inc* USA Software and Services
MPP Global Solutions kk* Japan Software and Services
* Indirectly held by Aptitude Software Group plc
** Aptitude Software Limited (03475849) and MPP Global Solutions Limited (03951843) have taken the audit exemption under S479A Companies Act 2006.
As at 31 December 2025, the Company owns 100% of the ordinary share capital and share premium in the above subsidiaries.
The registered office of the group’s principal subsidiaries which is not that of the Company are detailed below:
Subsidiary Registered office
Aptitude Software (Canada) Limited 1055 West Georgia Street, Suite 1500 Royal Centre, PO Box 11117, Vancouver, British Columbia,
V6E 4N7, Canada
Aptitude Software Inc CT Corporation System, 111 8th Avenue, New York, 10011
Aptitude Software (Poland) sp. z o.o. ul. Legnicka 48, Budynek G, 54-202 Wrocław, Poland
Aptitude Software (Singapore) pte. Limited 600 North Bridge Road, 23-01 Parkway Square, Singapore (188778)
Aptitude RevStream Inc. Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, Wilmington, New Castle Delaware, 19801
MPP Global Solutions Inc CT Corporation System, 111 8th Avenue, New York, 10011
MPP Global Solutions kk Tobu Bidg 6F, 6 Chrome-28-9 Jingumae, Shibuya, Tokyo 150-0001



Graphics
119

13. Other long term assets
Group
2025
£000
Group
2024
£000
Prepaid commission costs 530 730
Per IFRS 15, the Group’s assessment is that commission incurred on software licence sales meets the definition of
incremental costs of obtaining a contract. An asset is therefore recognised at inception of the contract for the total value of
commissions payable which is then amortised across the optimisation period assessed for each customer. Further detail on
the optimisation period can be found in the Group’s revenue recognition policy detailed on pages 89 to 92.
The Company held no other long term assets during the year (2024: £Nil).


14. Current income tax assets
As at 31 December 2025, the Group has income tax assets totalling £2,486,000 (2024: £1,721,000), which are expected to
be recovered in the normal course of business, with the majority anticipated within 12 months.


15. Deferred tax
Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences under the liability method using a tax rate of 25% (2024: 25%).
USA deferred tax is calculated using an effective rate of 27% being made up of 21% federal and 6% state tax (2024: 26%
made up of 21% federal and 5% state tax).
Deferred tax
Group
2025
£’000
Group
2024
£’000
Company
2025
£’000
Company
2024
£’000
Deferred tax
– Deferred tax assets 852 1,250
– Deferred tax liabilities (2,432) (3,722) (108) (45)
Deferred tax (liability) (1,580) (2,472) (108) (45)
Net deferred tax (liability)
Group
2025
£’000
Group
2024
£’000
Company
2025
£’000
Company
2024
£’000
At 1 January (2,472) (3,588) (157) (154)
Underlying items (charge)/credit to income statement for the year (291) (95) 20 (3)
Non-underlying deferred tax credit to the income statement for the year 887 871
Credit to equity (Note 27) 226 103
Charge to other comprehensive income (Note 25) 70 242 29
Exchange differences 15
Changes in tax rate (20)
At 31 December (1,580) (2,472) (108) (157)


Graphics
120
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
15. Deferred tax (continued)
Deferred tax assets are recognised in respect of tax losses and other temporary differences only to the extent that it is
probable that they will be recovered. At 31 December 2025, the Group had unused tax losses totalling £0.1 million (2024:
£1.9 million) available for offset against future profits. No deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of these losses
due to the unpredictability of future profit streams.
Deferred tax liabilities have not been recognised in respect of temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries
as the Group is able to control the timing of the reversal of these differences and it is probable that they will not reverse
in the foreseeable future. The aggregate amount of temporary differences for which deferred tax assets have not been
recognised is £35.9 million (2024: £29.0 million).
The deferred tax assets and liabilities have been shown gross on the balance sheet because they arise in separate tax
jurisdictions.
Deferred tax asset
2025
£000
2024
£000
Group
Short term timing differences 548 936
Other 304 314
382 1,250
Deferred tax liability
2025
£000
2024
£000
Group
Intangible fixed assets 2,392 3,747
Other 40 (25)
2,432 3,722
Accelerated
capital
allowances
£000
Short term
timing
differences
£000
Share-based
payments
£000
Cash flow
hedge
Total
£000
Company
At 1 January 2024 50 (1) (133) (84)
Total (charge) to income statement for the year (3) (3)
Charge to other comprehensive income (Note 25) 42 42
At 31 December 2024 47 (1) (91) (45)
Total (charge) to income statement for the year (34) (26) 26 (34)
Charge to other comprehensive income (Note 25) (29) (29)
At 31 December 2025 13 (26) (1) (94) (108)
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are only offset where there is a legally enforceable right of offset and there is an intention
to settle the balances net.


Graphics
121

16. Trade and other receivables
Group
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
31 Dec 2024
£000
Company
31 Dec 2025
£000
Company
31 Dec 2024
£000
Trade receivables 6,897 13,197
Less: provision for impairment of receivables (291) (1,107)
Trade receivables – net 6,606 12,090
Amount owed by group undertakings 34,429 15,352
Other receivables 398 216 109
Other tax and social security receivable 407 407
Prepayments 1,943 1,754 485 439
Accrued income 1,786 801
11,140 14,861 35,321 15,900
Within the trade receivables balance of £6.9 million (2024: £13.2 million) there are balances totalling £3.7 million (2024: £6.8
million) which, at 31 December 2025, were overdue for payment. Of this balance 86% (2024: 55%) has been collected at
13 March 2026 (2024: 24 March 2025). DSO (debtor days) decreased to 34 at 31 December 2025 (2024: 55) as a result
of improved collections at year-end combined with a detailed focus on a small number of long-running disputes being
settled prior to 31 December 2025. Deferred income at 31 December 2025 decreased to £28.2 million (2024: £32.2 million),
reflecting the recognition of revenue from prior-year invoicing outpacing new billings during the year.
The ageing of the trade receivables is as follows:
Trade receivables
31 Dec 2025
£000
31 Dec 2024
£000
Not past due 3,169 6,442
Past due
Less than one month overdue 2,443 3,247
One to two months overdue 772 1,171
Two to three months overdue 142 336
More than three months overdue 371 2,001
At 31 December 6,897 13,197
The Company had no trade receivables in either year.



Graphics
122
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements

16. Trade and other receivables (continued)
Trade and other receivables (excluding amounts owed by group undertakings) are denominated in the following currencies:
Group
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
31 Dec 2024
£000
Company
31 Dec 2025
£000
Company
31 Dec 2024
£000
Sterling 8,644 9,614 892 548
United States Dollars 2,315 5,108
Other 181 139
11,140 14,861 892 548
Movements on the provision for impairment of trade receivables are as follows:
Group
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
31 Dec 2024
£000
At 1 January 1,107 358
Recovery/write off of previously provided debts credited to income statement (728)
Impairment (credit)/charge recognised in the income statement (88) 749
At 31 December 291 1,107
The impairment credit of £0.8 million (2025) and the impairment charge of £0.7 million (2024) is recognised within operating
expenses in the consolidated statement of profit or loss in accordance with IAS 1.82(ba).



17. Financial instruments
At the balance sheet date, the fair value of outstanding forward foreign exchange contracts and the interest rate swap are:
31 Dec 2025 31 Dec 2024
Group
Assets
£000
Liabilities
£000
Assets
£000
Liabilities
£000
Interest rate swaps – cash flow hedges 103 368
Forward foreign exchange contracts – cash flow hedges 169 19 214
272 387 214
31 Dec 2025 31 Dec 2024
Company
Assets
£000
Liabilities
£000
Assets
£000
Liabilities
£000
Interest rate swaps – cash flow hedges 103 368
103 368
Total derivatives designated as hedging instruments
The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date is the fair value of the derivative assets in the consolidated
statement of financial position.



Graphics
123

17. Financial instruments (continued)
Currency derivatives
Forward foreign exchange contracts are used to hedge a proportion of both the Group’s forecast Polish Zloty denominated
costs over the next 6 months (2024: 12 months). The forward exchange contracts mature across the year.
The notional principal amounts outstanding at the balance sheet date are as follows:
31 Dec 2025
£000
31 Dec 2024
£000
Forward foreign exchange contracts – Polish Zloty 6,491 13,533
There is an economic relationship between the hedged items and the hedging instruments as the terms of the foreign
exchange contracts match the terms of highly probable forecast transactions (i.e. notional amount and expected payment
date). The Group has established a hedge ratio of 1:1 for the hedging relationships as the underlying risk of the foreign
exchange contracts are identical to the hedged risk components. To test hedge effectiveness, the Group uses the hypothetical
derivative method and compares the changes in the fair value of the hedging instruments against the changes in the fair
value of the hedged items attributable to the hedged risks.
In these hedge relationships, the main sources of ineffectiveness are:
Differences in the timing of the cash flows of the hedged items and the hedging instruments
Different indices (and accordingly different curves) linked to the hedged risk of the hedged items and hedging
instruments
The counterparties’ credit risk differently impacting the fair value movements of the hedging instruments and hedged
items
Changes to the forecasted amount of cash flows of hedged items and hedging instruments.
At 31 December 2025, the fair value of the Group’s currency derivatives is estimated to be an asset of approximately
£0.2 million (2024: liability of £0.2 million), based on market values derived from forward curves at the year end.
The forward contracts are designated as effective as cash flow hedges in accordance with IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’. The
fair value has been recognised in other comprehensive income and presented in the hedging reserve in equity.
Derivatives designated in hedging relationships at 31 December 2025:
Maturity
Polish Zloty (highly probable forecast purchase) 1-6 months 6-12 months Total
Notional amount (£000) 6,491 6,491
Average GBP:Zloty contract value 4.96 4.96
Change in fair value of hedging instruments used as the basis for recognising hedge ineffectiveness in
the period (£000) 364
Change in fair value of hedged items used as the basis for recognising hedge ineffectiveness in the
period (£000)
(364)
Derivatives designated in hedging relationships at 31 December 2024:
Maturity
Polish Zloty (highly probable forecast purchase) 1-6 months 6-12 months Total
Notional amount (£000) 6,670 6,863 13,533
Average GBP:Zloty contract value 5.07 5.16 5.11
Change in fair value of hedging instruments used as the basis for recognising hedge ineffectiveness in
the period (£000) (385)
Change in fair value of hedged items used as the basis for recognising hedge ineffectiveness in the
period (£000) 385
The ineffectiveness recognised in the income statement for the year ending 31 December 2025 was £Nil (2024: £Nil). The
amount recycled to the income statement in respect of contracts that matured in 2025 was a gain of £0.5 million (2024: gain
of £0.4 million) and has been recognised in operating costs.



Graphics
124
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements

17. Financial instruments (continued)
The effective fair value gain from hedging recognised in other comprehensive income during the year ending 31 December
2025 was £0.8 million (2024: loss of £0.4 million).
Interest rate swap
The Group has entered into floating-to-fixed interest rate swaps to hedge the variability in cash flows arising from borrowings
at floating rates as explained in note 19.
There is an economic relationship between the hedged items and the hedging instruments as the terms of the interest rate
swap contract match the terms of the highly probable forecast transactions (i.e. notional amount and expected payment
date). The Group has established a hedge ratio of 1:1 for the hedging relationships as the underlying risk of the interest rate
swap contract is identical to the hedged risk components. Potential sources of hedge ineffectiveness include designation of
off-market derivatives, differences between the notional amounts of the hedging instruments and the hedged items, as well
as timing differences between cash flows. To test hedge effectiveness, the Group uses the hypothetical derivative method
and compares the changes in the fair value of the hedging instruments against the changes in the fair value of the hedged
items attributable to the hedged risks.
At 31 December 2025, the fair value of the Group’s interest rate derivatives was an asset of £0.1 million (2024: £0.4 million),
determined by discounting expected future cash flows using prevailing market interest rates.
The interest rate swaps are designated as cash flow hedges in accordance with IFRS 9. The change in fair value of the
hedging instrument since the start of the year of less than £0.1 million (2024: £0.1 million) has been recognised in other
comprehensive income and accumulated in the hedging reserve.
Derivatives designated in hedging relationships at 31 December 2025:
Less than
Between
Between
1 year
1 and 2 years
2 and 5 years Total
Notional amount (£000) 1,250 1,250 3,500 6,000
Weighted average hedged rate – Fixed to floating SONIA + 1.4% SONIA + 1.4% SONIA + 1.4%
Weighted average hedged rate –Floating to fixed 2.84% 2.84% 2.84%
Change in fair value of hedging instruments used as the basis for recognising hedge
ineffectiveness in the period (£000) £380
Change in fair value of hedged items used as the basis for recognising hedge
ineffectiveness in the period (£000) (380)
The effective portion of changes in the fair value of the interest rate swaps is recognised in other comprehensive income.
Amounts accumulated in the cash flow hedge reserve are reclassified to the statement of comprehensive income in the
same period as the hedged cash flows affect profit or loss and are recognised in finance costs. During the year, following
the discontinuation of the previous hedging relationship, amounts previously recognised in the cash flow hedge reserve in
respect of the 2026 swap were fully recycled to profit or loss and recognised in finance costs. A new interest rate swap has
subsequently been designated in a cash flow hedging relationship. The amount recognised in finance costs in respect of
interest rate swap settlements during the year was £0.4 million (2024: gain of £0.3 million). Hedge ineffectiveness recognised
in the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2025 was £Nil (2024: £Nil).



Graphics
125


17. Financial instruments (continued)
Fair values of non-derivative financial assets and financial liabilities
Where market values are not available, fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities have been calculated by
discounting expected future cash flows at prevailing interest rates and by applying year-end exchange rates.
31 Dec 2025 31 Dec 2024
Note
Book value
£000
Fair value
£000
Book value
£000
Fair value
£000
Group
Cash at bank and in hand 18 29,558 29,558 30,400 30,400
31 Dec 2025 31 Dec 2024
Note
Book value
£000
Fair value
£000
Book value
£000
Fair value
£000
Company
Cash at bank and in hand 18 6,722 6,722 17,822 17,822
The carrying amount of borrowings, short term payables and receivables, net of impairment, is equal to their fair value.
Neither the Group or the Company defaulted on any loans during the year. In addition the Group and Company did not
breach the terms of any loan agreements during the year.

Credit quality of financial assets
The credit quality of financial assets can be assessed by reference to the customer type.
Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Trade receivables
Banks and financial institutions 1,629 3,303
Other corporates 1,540 3,139
Total current trade receivables 3,169 6,442
Banks and financial institutions 1,912 1,744
Other corporates 1,816 5,011
Overdue trade receivables 3,728 6,755
Total trade receivables 6,897 13,197
Cash at bank and short-term bank deposits
Current Rating
(Moody’s)
2025
£000
2024
£000
A3 25,439 27,608
Aa3 3,755 2,176
Aa1 307 559
A1 57 57
29,558 30,400
None of the financial assets that are fully performing have been renegotiated in the last year.


Graphics
126
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
18. Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents are denominated in the following currencies:
Group
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
31 Dec 2024
£000
Company
31 Dec 2025
£000
Company
31 Dec 2024
£000
Sterling 8,719 18,589 6,722 17,822
United States Dollar 16,470 10,401
Euros 731 502
Canadian Dollar 1,825 647
Polish Zloty 1,779 189
Singapore Dollar 31 69
Japanese Yen 3 3
Cash at bank and in hand
29,558 30,400 6,722 17,822
The effective interest rate on short term deposits was 0.6% (2024: 1.4%).

19. Financial liabilities
Group
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
31 Dec 2024
£000
Company
31 Dec 2025
£000
Company
31 Dec 2024
£000
Bank loan 5,940 7,180 5,940 7,180
The borrowings are repayable as follows:
Within one year 1,250 7,188 1,250 7,188
In the second year 1,250 1,250
In the third to fifth years inclusive 3,500 3,500
6,000 7,188 6,000 7,188
Unamortised prepaid facility arrangement fees (60) (8) (60) (8)
As at 31 December
5,940 7,180 5,940 7,180
Of the total borrowings, £4.7 million is repayable after more than one year.
On 14 October 2025, the Group refinanced its existing borrowings with Bank of Ireland. The previous loan, with an outstanding
principal balance of £7.1 million, was fully repaid on that date.
Concurrently, the Group entered into a new loan agreement with HSBC UK for a principal amount of £6.0 million. The
refinancing completed during the year provides the Group with committed funding for a minimum period of three years
from October 2025. Together with the Group’s existing cash balances and forecast operating cash flows, the Directors
believe the Group has sufficient liquidity and covenant headroom to meet its obligations as they fall due over the forecast
period. The facility agreement also provides extension options which, if exercised, would extend the maturity beyond the
initial three-year term. The new facility has a contractual term of three years, with an option to extend for a further one year,
subject to lender approval. The loan bears interest at SONIA plus a 1.40% margin.
In addition, the Group has a £5.0 million Revolving Credit Facility (“RCF”) with HSBC UK, which bears interest at SONIA plus
a 1.50% margin on any amounts drawn. An uncommitted accordion option of up to £5.0 million was also available. A 35%
charge is applied to the undrawn portion of the RCF, resulting in an undrawn fee calculated of 0.525%.
The term loan is repayable in quarterly instalments of £0.3 million, with the remaining balance repayable at maturity. The
revolving credit facility is repayable at maturity, unless repaid earlier.



Graphics
127

19. Financial liabilities (continued)
The facilities are senior secured and supported by customary guarantees and security granted by certain Group entities,
including fixed and floating charges over certain assets of the Group. These security arrangements were registered with
Companies House on 15 October 2025, following the creation of the charge on 14 October 2025.
The facility agreement contains customary financial covenants, which are tested periodically in accordance with the terms
of the agreement. These include financial ratio covenants typically based on leverage and interest cover metrics calculated
on a consolidated Group basis. The Directors confirm that the Group complied with all covenant requirements throughout
the year and at the reporting date. The Group monitors covenant compliance and liquidity headroom on a regular basis as
part of its treasury management processes.
Total transaction costs incurred in relation to the refinancing have been capitalised and are being amortised over the
expected life of the facilities using the effective interest method.
At 31 December 2025, the Group had £5.0 million of undrawn committed borrowing facilities, excluding the uncommitted
accordion option. These facilities provide the Group with additional liquidity and financial flexibility to support working
capital requirements and strategic initiatives.



20. Trade and other payables
Group
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
31 Dec 2024
£000
Company
31 Dec 2025
£000
Company
31 Dec 2024
£000
Trade payables 1,099 405 54 74
Amounts owed to group undertakings 33,820 18,292
Other tax and social security payable 898 929 381 14
Other payables 410 154 90
Accruals 7,328 6,909 931 563
9,735 8,397 35,276 18,943
Amounts owed to group undertakings represent short-term funding provided through the Group’s central
treasury arrangements.
These balances are:
unsecured
interest free
repayable on demand
During the year, the Company received £54.4 million from, and advanced £52.3 million to, group undertakings, resulting in
net funding of £2.1 million (2024: £11.2 million).
The movement reflects the Company’s participation in the Group’s treasury arrangements, under which funding is provided
and repaid through intercompany balances depending on operational cash requirements.
20. (a) Contract liabilities / Deferred income
Group
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
31 Dec 2024
£000
Deferred income 28,227 32,225
The decrease in deferred revenue reflects the recognition of revenue from prior year invoicing exceeding new billings during
the year. The Group continues to maintain a strong base of recurring subscription revenue.
The deferred income balance has been shown as a separate line on the face of the Statement of Financial Position in 2025
to provide better clarity and transparency to the users (with the comparatives updated on a consistent basis).



Graphics
128
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
21. Capital lease obligations
The Group leases various offices and plant and machinery which, following the adoption of IFRS 16 met the criteria set out
to be recognised as capital lease agreements.
Group
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
31 Dec 2024
£000
Amounts payable under lease liabilities:
Within one year 622 633
Within two to five years 1,832 2,111
After five years 182 544
Total 2,636 3,288
Less: future finance charges (239) (345)
Present value of lease obligations 2,397 2,943
Less: Amount due for settlement within 12 months (shown under current liabilities) (543) (527)
As at 31 December 1,854 2,416
Group
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
31 Dec 2024
£000
The present value of financial lease liabilities is split as follows:
Within one year 543 527
Within two to five years 1,681 1,890
After five years 173 526
2,397 2,943
The Company had no capital lease obligations during the year (2024: Nil).
Group
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
31 Dec 2024
£000
Liability as at 1 January 2,943 3,014
Additions 398
Interest 111 119
Foreign exchange (32) 4
Repayments (625) (592)
Liability as at 31 December 2,397 2,943
Total cash outflows from all leases totalled £0.9 million (2024: £1.0 million), of which £0.2 million (2024: £0.3 million)
related to short term or low value leases. These amounts are displayed within the cash flows from operating activities in the
statement of cash flows.


Graphics
129
22. Provisions
31 Dec 2025
£000
31 Dec 2024
£000
Group
At 1 January 383 368
Charged to income statement (6) 19
Foreign exchange (4)
At 31 December
377 383
Provisions have been analysed between current and non-current as follows:
31 Dec 2025
£000
31 Dec 2024
£000
Current 25
Non-current 377 358
377 383
£0.3 million (2024: £0.3 million) of the total provision at 31 December 2025 of £0.4 million (2024: £0.4 million) relates to the
cost of dilapidations in respect of its occupied leasehold premises.
All of the non-current provision is expected to unwind within 2 to 5 years (2024: 2 to 5 years).

23. Share capital
31 Dec 2025 31 Dec 2024
Number £000 Number £000
Group and Company
Ordinary shares of 7 1/3p each
Issued and fully paid:
At 1 January 57,337,611 4,204 57,337,611 4,204
Shares issued 6,707
Shares cancelled (1,233,354) (89)
At 31 December 56,110,964 4,115 57,337,611 4,204
The number of ordinary shares for which Aptitude employees hold options and the period to which the options are
exercisable are as follows (note 30):
Period
Year of
grant
Exercise
price
2025
Number
2024
Number
Between 12 March 2022 and 10 August 2029 2019 7 1/3p 12,480 12,480
Between 1 November 2024 and 1 May 2025 2021 692.0p 338
Between 1 November 2024 and 1 May 2025 2021 700.0p 22,890
Between 22 November 2025 and 22 May 2032 2022 7 1/3p 260,771
Between 1 December 2025 and 1 May 2026 2022 372.5p 2,416 22,590
Between 1 December 2025 and 1 May 2026 2022 335.0p 182,294 278,141
Between 5 September 2026 and 5 September 2033 2023 7 1/3p 230,796 338,532
Between 5 September 2028 and 5 September 2035 2023 7 1/3p 38,589 74,660
Between 1 December 2026 and 1 May 2027 2023 236.0p 80,958 111,983
Between 1 December 2026 and 1 May 2027 2023 280.0p 467,660 687,522
Between 5 September 2027 and 5 September 2034 2024 7 1/3p 271,817 399,912
Between 5 September 2029 and 5 September 2036 2024 7 1/3p 11,697 63,467
Between 1 December 2027 and 1 May 2028 2024 274.0p 14,894 34,905
Between 1 December 2027 and 1 May 2028 2024 331.0p 69,500 102,574
Between 18 September 2028 and 18 September 2035 2025 7 1/3p 389,762
Between 1 December 2028 and 1 May 2029 2025 236.0p 12,370
Between 1 December 2028 and 1 May 2029 2025 304.0p 166,520
1,951,753 2,410,765



Graphics
130
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements

24. Share premium account
2025
£000
2024
£000
Group and Company
At 1 January 11,959 11,959
At 31 December 11,959 11,959
25. Other reserves
Derivatives
hedge
reserve
£000
Merger
reserve
£000
Employee
benefit
trust reserve
£000
Total
£000
Group
At 1 January 2024 856 34,195 (62) 34,989
Cash flow hedges reclassified to income statement (713) (713)
Gain on effective cash flow hedges (254) (254)
Deferred tax on cash flow hedges 242 242
Transfer on exercise of options 85 85
Purchase of own shares (24) (24)
At 31 December 2024 131 34,195 (1) 34,325
Cash flow hedges reclassified to income statement (847) (847)
Gains on cash flow hedges 830 830
Deferred tax movements (70) (70)
Transfer from EBT (3,288) (3,288)
Transfer on exercise of options 1 1
At 31 December 2025
44 34,195 (3,288) 30,951
Derivatives
hedge reserve
£000
Merger reserve
£000
Employee
benefit trust
reserve
£000
Total
£000
Company
At 1 January 2024 371 17,398 (62) 17,707
Cash flow hedges reclassified to income statement (297) (297)
Gain on effective cash flow hedges 131 131
Deferred tax on cash flow hedges 42 42
Transfer on exercise of options 85 85
Purchase of own shares (24) (24)
At 31 December 2024 247 17,398 (1) 17,644
Cash flow hedges reclassified to income statement (379) (379)
Deferred tax on cash flow hedges (29) (29)
Transfer from EBT (3,288) (3,288)
Transfer on exercise of options 1 1
At 31 December 2025 (161) 17,398 (3,288) 13,949



Graphics
131


26. Treasury shares reserves
Group
£000
Company
£000
At 1 January 2024
Purchase of own shares (4,014) (4,014)
Transfer on exercise of options 202 202
At 31 December 2024 (3,812) (3,812)
Purchase of own shares (5,051) (5,051)
Transfer on exercise of options 9 9
Transfer to EBT 3,288 3,288
Cancellation of shares 3,953 3,953
At 31 December 2025 (1,613) (1,613)
1,648,025 shares were purchased by the Company in 2025 for a total cost of £5.1m (2024: 1,185,400 shares at a cost
of £4.0m) under the Company’s share buyback programme. The EBT holds 1,000,558 (2024: 558) ordinary shares in the
Company.
During the year, the Company cancelled 1,233,354 ordinary shares which were previously held in treasury. The nominal
value of £89k has been deducted from share capital, with £3,953k transferred from the treasury shares reserve to retained
earnings. At 31 December 2025, 531,40 shares remained held in treasury.

27. Retained earnings / (accumulated losses)
Group
£000
Company
£000
At 1 January 2024 (2,349) 23,768
Profit for the year 4,980 14,476
Share options – value of employee service (Note 30) 611 611
Transfer on exercise of options (287) (287)
Deferred tax on share options (Note 15) 103
Dividends paid (Note 8) (3,081) (3,081)
At 31 December 2024 (23) 35,487
Profit for the year 4,024 687
Other movements (11)
Share options – value of employee service (Note 30) 379 379
Transfer on exercise of options (10) (10)
Deferred tax on share options (Note 15) 226
Dividends paid (Note 8) (2,999) (2,999)
Cancellation of shares (3,953) (3,953)
At 31 December 2025 (2,356) 29,580
The profit for the financial year dealt with in the financial statements of the Company was £687,000 (2024: profit of
£14,476,000). As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, no separate income statement or statement of
comprehensive income is presented in respect of the Company.
Of the Company’s £29.6 million retained earnings, £25.9 million (2024: £32.2m) is distributable to shareholders following
adjustment for the cumulative impact of share options value of service through reserves.



Graphics
132
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
28. Cash flows from operating activities
Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash generated from operations:
Group
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Group
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Company
Year ended
31 Dec 2025
£000
Company
Year ended
31 Dec 2024
£000
Profit before tax for the period 4,640 5,593 687 14,476
Adjustments for:
 Depreciation 1,208 1,304 11 11
 Amortisation 3,447 3,447
 Share-based payment expense 379 611
 Finance income (146) (368) (146) (357)
 Finance costs 312 450 135 290
Changes in working capital:
Decrease / (Increase) in receivables 3,721 (2,049) (344)
Decrease in payables (2,660) (136) 805 (96)
Decrease in provision (6)
Cash generated from operations 10,895 8,852 1,148 14,324


29. Commitments
The Group and Company have no commitments other than short term leases or a lease of low-value asset during the year
(2024: £Nil).


30. Share based payments
Performance Share Plan (PSP)
Under the 2016 Performance Share Plan (PSP), the Remuneration Committee is allowed to grant conditional allocations of
par value options in the Company to key executives. The contractual life of an option is 10 years. The PSP is considered a
Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) award.
241,566 options were granted on 18 September 2025 (2024: 394,578 awards granted). The performance conditions are in
line with those described for the executive Directors on page 57.
The inputs inserted into the Monte Carlo Pricing model for the options granted in 2025 are detailed below.
Item Value
Exercise price 7 1/3p
Expected volatility 48.00%
Dividend yield 1.80%
Risk-free interest rate 3.89%
Share price at grant date 300p
For the calculation of the expected volatility, historical share price volatility was used as a guide over a commensurate period
to the expected term of awards.
At the year end there were 9 (2024: 39) employees currently participating in the scheme. Exercise of an option is subject to
continued employment.


Graphics
133
30. Share based payments (continued)
Details of the share options outstanding under the PSP during the year are as follows:
2025 2024
Number
Weighted
average
exercise
price Number
Weighted
average
exercise price
Outstanding at 1 January 862,136 7 1/3p 788,863 7 1/3p
Granted 241,566 7 1/3p 394,578 7 1/3p
Exercised 7 1/3p (66,087) 7 1/3p
Lapsed (411,467) 7 1/3p (255,218) 7 1/3p
Outstanding at 31 December 692,235 7 1/3p 862,136 7 1/3p
Exercisable at 31 December 12,480 7 1/3p 12,480 7 1/3p
Nil (2024: 66,087) PSP share options were exercised in 2025. The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for
share options exercised during 2025 under the Share Option Plans was Nil (2024: 305p).
The options outstanding at the end of the year have an expected weighted average remaining contractual life of 8.78 years
(2024: 8.94 years).
No options have expired during the periods covered by the above tables.
Share option plans
The Group has set up several Share Option Plans, under which the Remuneration Committee can grant options over shares
in the Company to employees of the Group. Options are granted with a fixed exercise price equal to the market price of the
shares under option at the date of grant. The contractual life of an option is 3 years. 162 employees (2024: 239) currently
participate in these Plans.
Options granted under the Share Option Plans will become exercisable on the third anniversary of the date of grant, subject
to specific criteria being met.
Exercise of an option is subject to continued employment.
Details of the share options outstanding under the Share Option Plans during the year are as follows:
2025 2024
Number
Weighted
average
exercise
price Number
Weighted
average
exercise
price
Outstanding at 1 January 1,260,943 284.78p 1,398,071 309.09p
Granted 178,890 299.30p 144,249 314.53p
Exercised (2,584) 280.00p 00.00p
Lapsed (440,637) 318.79p (281,377) 420.83p
Outstanding at 31 December 996,612 272.36p 1,260,943 284.78p
Exercisable at 31 December 184,710 335.49p 23,228 699.88p
The inputs inserted into the Black Scholes Pricing model for the options granted in 2025 are detailed below.
Item UK International
Exercise price 236p 304p
Expected volatility 37.90% 37.90%
Dividend yield 1.78% 1.78%
Risk-free interest rate 3.99% 3.99%
Expected cancellation rate 5% 5%


Graphics
134
Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
30. Share based payments (continued)
For the calculation of the expected volatility, historical share price volatility was used as a guide over a commensurate period
to the expected term of awards.
The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for share options exercised during the year under the Share Option
Plans was £2.80 (2024: £Nil).
The options outstanding at the end of the year have an expected weighted average remaining contractual life of 1.59 years
(2024: 2.17 years).
No options have expired during the periods covered by the above tables.
Restricted Stock Units (RSUs)
During the year, the Group issued Restricted Stock Units (RSUs), under which the Remuneration Committee can grant
options over shares in the Company to employees of the Group. Options are granted with a fixed exercise price equal to the
market price of the shares under option at the date of grant. The contractual life of an option is 10 years. At the year end
there were 24 (2024: 21) employees currently participating in the scheme.
Options granted as Restricted Stock Units will become exercisable on the third anniversary of the date of grant, subject to
specific criteria being met.
Exercise of an option is subject to continued employment.
Details of the share options outstanding under the Share Option Plans during the year are as follows:
2025 2024
Number
Weighted
average
exercise price Number
Weighted
average
exercise price
Outstanding at 1 January 287,686 7 1/3p 147,031 7 1/3p
Granted 148,196 7 1/3p 145,092 7 1/3p
Lapsed (172,976) 7 1/3p (4,437) 7 1/3p
Outstanding at 31 December 262,906 7 1/3p 287,686 7 1/3p
Exercisable at 31 December
The inputs inserted into the Black Scholes Pricing model for the options granted in 2025 are detailed below.
Value
Exercise price 7 1/3p
Expected volatility 38.10%
Dividend yield 1.80%
Risk-free interest rate 3.89%
For the calculation of the expected volatility, historical share price volatility was used as a guide over a commensurate period
to the expected term of awards.
The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for share options exercised during the year under the Share Option
Plans was £Nil (2024: £Nil).
The options outstanding at the end of the year have an expected weighted average remaining contractual life of 9.1 years
(2024: 9.15 years).
The Group recognised total expenses of £0.4 million (2024: £0.6 million) related to equity-settled share-based payment
transactions during the year. After deferred tax, the total charge in the income statement was £0.5 million (2024: £0.7
million). There was a deferred tax credit of £0.2 million (2024: credit of £0.1 million) taken directly to equity.
The Company recognised total income of £Nil (2024: £Nil) related to equity-settled share-based payment transactions
during the year. After deferred tax, the total credit in the income statement was £Nil (2024: £Nil). There was a deferred tax
credit of £Nil (2024: £Nil) taken directly to equity.


Graphics
135
31. Retirement benefit schemes
The Group operates defined contribution retirement benefit plans for qualifying employees in the UK. The assets of the
plans are held separately from those of the Group in funds under the control of trustees.
The Group also operates defined contribution retirement benefit plans for its overseas employees with contributions up to
6% of basic salary.
The total expense in the income statement of £1.0 million (2024: £1.1 million) represents contributions payable to these
plans by the Group at rates specified in the rules of the plans. As at 31 December 2025, no contributions due in respect of
the 2025 reporting year had not been paid over to the plans and were included within accruals.

32. Related party transactions
During the year, the following directors were paid dividends as ordinary shareholders from Aptitude Software Group plc
whilst acting as a director:
Ivan Martin was paid dividends of £12,150 (2024: £12,150). Alex Curran was paid dividends of £644 (2024: £644).
There were no further related party transactions in the year ended 31 December 2025 (2024: £Nil), as defined by International
Accounting Standard No 24 “Related Party Disclosures” other than key management compensation as disclosed in note 4.


Graphics
Shareholder Information
136
Analysis of register of members
As at 31 December 2025, the Company had 796 registered holders of ordinary shares. Their shareholdings are analysed below:
Size of shareholding
Number of
shareholders
Percentage of
shareholders
Number of
shares
Percentage of
issued shares
1-1,000 493 61.9% 137,795 0.2%
1,001-5,000 162 20.3% 361,666 0.6%
5,001-50,000 80 10.1% 1,381,859 2.5%
50,001-500,000 41 5.2% 7,736,546 13.8%
500,001-above 20 2.5% 46,493,098 82.9%
Total 796 100% 56,110,964 100%
Shareholder type
Number of
shareholders
Percentage of
shareholders
Number of
shares
Percentage of
issued shares
Institutional shareholders 164 20.6% 54,473,979 97.0%
Private shareholders 632 79.4% 1,636,985 3.0%
Total 796 100% 56,110,964 100%
Share register enquiries
Shareholders’ enquiries regarding shareholdings or dividends should in the first instance be addressed to our registrar:
MUFG Corporate Markets (formerly known as Link Group)
Central Square
29 Wellington Street
Leeds LS1 4DL.
0371.664.0300 (Calls are charged at the standard geographic rate and will vary by provider)
Outside UK +44 (0) 371.664.0300 (Calls are charged at the standard geographic rate and will vary by provider)
Lines are open Monday - Friday 9am - 5:30pm
Email: shareholderenquiries@cm.mpms.mufg.com
You can also manage your shareholding online at https://uk.investorcentre.mpms.mufg.com/Login/Login
Donate your shares to charity
If you have only a small number of shares which are uneconomical to sell you may wish to donate them to charity free of charge
through ShareGift (Registered Charity10528686).
Find out more at www.sharegift.org.uk or by telephoning 020 7930 3737.
Share fraud warning
Share fraud includes scams where investors are called out of the blue and offered shares that often turn out to be worthless or
non-existent, or an inflated price for shares they own. These calls come from fraudsters operating in ‘boiler rooms’ that are mostly
based abroad.
While high profits are promised, those who buy or sell shares in this way usually lose their money.
The Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) has found most share fraud victims are experienced investors who lose an average of
£20,000, with around £200m lost in the UK each year.

Graphics
137
Protect yourself
If you are offered unsolicited investment advice, discounted shares, a premium price for shares you own, or free company or
research reports, you should take these steps before handing over any money:
Get the name of the person and organisation contacting you.
Check the Financial Services Register at http://www.fca.org.uk/ to ensure they are authorised.
Use the details on the FCA Register to contact the firm.
Call the FCA Consumer Helpline on 0800.111.6768 if there are no contact details on the Register or you are told they are out
of date.
Search our list of unauthorised firms and individuals to avoid doing business with.
Annual General Meeting of shareholders
We consider the Annual General Meeting of shareholders (AGM) to be an important event in our calendar and a significant
opportunity to engage with our shareholders. The 2026 AGM will be held at 9:00 a.m. on Wednesday 27 May 2026 at the offices of
Aptitude Software Group plc, 8th Floor, 138 Cheapside, London, EC2V 6BJ. Details are given in a separate notice to shareholders.
A copy of the Notice of Annual General Meeting together with this Annual Report is posted on the Company’s website
www.aptitudesoftware.com. Shareholders are strongly encouraged to vote ahead of the meeting regardless of whether they plan
to attend the AGM in person, to mitigate against the risk of disruptions such as train strikes.
Shareholders are also invited to submit questions ahead of the AGM. Details of how to do this are contained in the Notice of
Annual General Meeting
Website
The investor section of the Group’s corporate website, www.aptitidesoftware.com contains a wide range of information including
regulatory news, results announcements, share price information and information about our Board and Committees. It is also
possible to sign up to receive regulatory news relating to Aptitude Software plc alerts by email at www.aptitudesoftware.com/
investor-relations/email-alerts/

Graphics
Advisors
Independent Auditor
RSM UK Audit LLP
6th Floor,
25 Farringdon Street
London
EC4A 4AB
Financial Advisor and
Stockbroker
Canaccord Genuity Limited
88 Wood Street
London
EC2V 7QR
Financial Public Relations
Alma PR
71-73 Carter Lane
London
EC4V 5EQ
Registrars
MUFG Corporate Markets
(formerly known as
Link Group)
Central Square
29 Wellington Street
Leeds
LS1 4DL
Company’s Registered Office

8th Floor
138 Cheapside
London
EC2V 6BJ
Company number: 01602662

Graphics
© Aptitude Software Limited 2014 - 2025. All Rights Reserved. APTITUDE, APTITUDE ACCOUNTING HUB, APTITUDE LEASE ACCOUNTING ENGINE,
REVSTREAM, APTITUDE REVENUE RECOGNITION ENGINE, FYNAPSE and the triangle device are trademarks of Aptitude Software Limited. Aptitude
U.S. and European Patents Pending and Granted. For more information, please refer to: https:// www.aptitudesoftware.com/
patentsandtrademarks
www.aptitudesoftware.com
Contact us
Poland
ul. Legnicka 48
Budynek G
54-202 Wroclaw
Tel: +48 71 35 83 010
Annual Report 2025
London
8th Floor
138 Cheapside,
London, EC2V 6BJ
Tel: 44 (0)20 3687 3200
Boston
Suite 1310
101 Federal Street
Boston, MA 02110
Tel: +1 (857) 201-3432